WO2021169245A1 - 一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端 - Google Patents

一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021169245A1
WO2021169245A1 PCT/CN2020/114566 CN2020114566W WO2021169245A1 WO 2021169245 A1 WO2021169245 A1 WO 2021169245A1 CN 2020114566 W CN2020114566 W CN 2020114566W WO 2021169245 A1 WO2021169245 A1 WO 2021169245A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
lens group
zoom lens
lens
focal length
zoom
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/114566
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
姚秀文
周少攀
贾远林
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP20921054.1A priority Critical patent/EP4099076A4/en
Priority to KR1020227032784A priority patent/KR20220136452A/ko
Priority to JP2022551577A priority patent/JP2023515193A/ja
Publication of WO2021169245A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021169245A1/zh
Priority to US17/896,276 priority patent/US20220413269A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B15/00—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification
    • G02B15/14—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective
    • G02B15/16—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective with interdependent non-linearly related movements between one lens or lens group, and another lens or lens group
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B15/00—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification
    • G02B15/14—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective
    • G02B15/16—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective with interdependent non-linearly related movements between one lens or lens group, and another lens or lens group
    • G02B15/163—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective with interdependent non-linearly related movements between one lens or lens group, and another lens or lens group having a first movable lens or lens group and a second movable lens or lens group, both in front of a fixed lens or lens group
    • G02B15/167—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective with interdependent non-linearly related movements between one lens or lens group, and another lens or lens group having a first movable lens or lens group and a second movable lens or lens group, both in front of a fixed lens or lens group having an additional fixed front lens or group of lenses
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B15/00—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification
    • G02B15/14—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective
    • G02B15/143—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective having three groups only
    • G02B15/1435—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective having three groups only the first group being negative
    • G02B15/143503—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective having three groups only the first group being negative arranged -+-
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B13/00—Optical objectives specially designed for the purposes specified below
    • G02B13/001—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras
    • G02B13/0015—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras characterised by the lens design
    • G02B13/002—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras characterised by the lens design having at least one aspherical surface
    • G02B13/0045—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras characterised by the lens design having at least one aspherical surface having five or more lenses
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B13/00—Optical objectives specially designed for the purposes specified below
    • G02B13/001—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras
    • G02B13/009—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras having zoom function
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B15/00—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification
    • G02B15/14—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective
    • G02B15/144—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective having four groups only
    • G02B15/1445—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective having four groups only the first group being negative
    • G02B15/144511—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective having four groups only the first group being negative arranged -+-+
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B15/00—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification
    • G02B15/14—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective
    • G02B15/15—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective compensation by means of only one movement or by means of only linearly related movements, e.g. optical compensation
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B15/00—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification
    • G02B15/14—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective
    • G02B15/16—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective with interdependent non-linearly related movements between one lens or lens group, and another lens or lens group
    • G02B15/177—Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective with interdependent non-linearly related movements between one lens or lens group, and another lens or lens group having a negative front lens or group of lenses
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00—Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/02—Bodies
    • G03B17/12—Bodies with means for supporting objectives, supplementary lenses, filters, masks, or turrets
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B5/00—Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G03B5/02—Lateral adjustment of lens
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/50—Constructional details
    • H04N23/51—Housings
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B2205/00—Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G03B2205/0046—Movement of one or more optical elements for zooming

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of terminal technology, and in particular to a zoom lens, a camera module and a mobile terminal.
  • the high-magnification optical zoom of the mobile phone lenses on the market generally adopts the "jumping" zoom adjustment method, such as by carrying multiple lenses with different focal lengths, combined with algorithm-based digital zoom to achieve hybrid optics Zooming, but this kind of zooming method cannot achieve true continuous zooming.
  • the imaging sharpness in the focal length range where the focal length range of the above multiple cameras is disconnected is poor, compared to the true continuous zooming Mode shooting sharpness is reduced. Therefore, the shooting quality of the zoom lens is affected.
  • This application provides a zoom lens, a camera module and a mobile terminal to improve the shooting quality of the zoom lens.
  • a zoom lens which is used in mobile terminals such as mobile phones and tablet computers.
  • the zoom lens includes a plurality of lens groups, and these lens groups include a first lens group, a second lens group, and a third lens group arranged from the object side to the image side; wherein, the first lens group has a negative optical focus
  • the second lens group is a lens group with positive refractive power
  • the third lens group is a lens group with negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group is a fixed lens group
  • the second lens group and the third lens group are used to move along the optical axis when the zoom lens zooms to adjust the focal length.
  • the second lens group is used as a zoom lens group, which can slide along the optical axis on the image side of the first lens group; Slide the side along the optical axis.
  • the zoom lens is zoomed from the wide-angle state to the telephoto state, both the second lens group and the third lens group are moved to the object side, and the distance between the third lens group and the second lens group is The distance is first reduced and then increased to achieve continuous zooming of the zoom lens, which improves the shooting quality of the zoom lens.
  • the total number N of lenses in the first lens group, the second lens group, and the third lens group satisfies:
  • the lenses included in the zoom lens satisfy:
  • N the number of aspheric surfaces ⁇ 2N, where the number of aspheric surfaces refers to the number of aspheric surfaces in all lenses included in the zoom lens; in order to improve imaging quality.
  • the zoom lens further includes a fourth lens group, and the fourth lens group is located in the The image side of the third lens group, wherein the fourth lens group is a lens group with positive refractive power; the fourth lens group is a fixed lens group.
  • the fourth lens group is a lens group with positive refractive power
  • the fourth lens group is a fixed lens group.
  • the total number of lenses in the first lens group, the second lens group, the third lens group, and the fourth lens group The number N satisfies:
  • the lenses included in the zoom lens satisfy:
  • N the number of aspheric surfaces ⁇ 2N, where the number of aspheric surfaces refers to the number of aspheric surfaces in all lenses included in the zoom lens; in order to improve imaging quality.
  • the focal length f1 of the first lens group and the focal length ft of the telephoto end of the zoom lens satisfy: 0.2 ⁇
  • the focal length f2 and ft of the second lens group satisfy: 0.10 ⁇
  • the focal length f3 and ft of the third lens group satisfy: 0.10 ⁇
  • the first lens group to the third lens group can adopt different combinations, such as:
  • the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power Arranged in order from the object side to the image side: the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f1 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.579; the first lens group with positive refractive power Two lens group G2, the ratio of the focal length f2 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.293; the third lens group G3 with negative refractive power, the ratio of the focal length f3 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens :
  • 0.308. or,
  • the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power Arranged in order from the object side to the image side: the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f1 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.573; the first lens group with positive refractive power Two lens group G2, the ratio of the focal length f2 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.282; the third lens group G3 with negative refractive power, the ratio of the focal length f3 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens :
  • 0.147. or
  • the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power Arranged in order from the object side to the image side: the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f1 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.605; the first lens group with positive refractive power
  • 0.283; the ratio of the focal length f3 of the third lens group G3 with negative refractive power to the focal length ft of the telephoto end of the lens :
  • 0.298. or,
  • the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power Arranged in order from the object side to the image side: the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f1 to the focal length ft of the telephoto end of the lens (that is, the focal length when the zoom lens is in the telephoto state):
  • 0.796; the ratio of the focal length f2 of the second lens group G2 with positive refractive power to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.309; the third lens group G3 with negative refractive power, The ratio of the focal length f3 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.597. or,
  • the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power Arranged in order from the object side to the image side: the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f1 to the focal length ft of the lens at the telephoto end:
  • 0.556; the first lens group with positive refractive power Two lens group G2, the ratio of the focal length f2 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.241; the third lens group G3 with negative refractive power, the ratio of the focal length f3 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens :
  • 0.211; the ratio of the focal length f4 of the fourth lens group G4 with positive refractive power to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.286. or,
  • the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power Arranged in order from the object side to the image side: the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f1 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.579; the first lens group with positive refractive power
  • 0.260;
  • 0.205;
  • 0.307. or,
  • the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power Arranged in order from the object side to the image side: the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the ratio of the focal length f1 to the focal length ft of the lens at the telephoto end:
  • 0.634; the first lens group with positive refractive power Two lens group G2, the ratio of the focal length f2 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.228; the third lens group G3 with negative refractive power, the ratio of the focal length f3 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens :
  • 0.171;
  • 0.570. or,
  • the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power Arranged in order from the object side to the image side: the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f1 to the focal length ft of the lens at the telephoto end:
  • 0.447; the first lens group with positive refractive power
  • 0.217;
  • 0.202; the ratio of the focal length f4 of the fourth lens group G4 with positive refractive power to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.881.
  • the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power Arranged in order from the object side to the image side: the first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the ratio of the focal length f1 to the focal length ft of the lens at the telephoto end:
  • 0.71; the first lens group with positive refractive power Two lens group G2, the ratio of the focal length f2 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.23; the third lens group G3 with negative refractive power, the ratio of the focal length f3 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens :
  • 0.335; the ratio of the focal length f4 of the fourth lens group G4 with positive refractive power to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.384.
  • the distance between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface satisfies: 0.12 ⁇
  • the distance between the movement stroke L2 of the third lens group along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface satisfies: 0.08 ⁇
  • the second lens group includes at least one negative power lens to correct aberrations.
  • it further includes a prism or mirror, wherein the prism or mirror is located on the object side of the first lens group; the prism or mirror is used to deflect light to the first lens group.
  • Lens group to realize periscope shooting, which facilitates more flexible design of the installation position and direction of the zoom lens.
  • the lens of each lens group in the zoom lens has a cutout for reducing the height of the lens, so as to reduce the occupied space of the zoom lens, and at the same time, the amount of light can be increased.
  • the vertical height h of the lenses included in each lens group in the zoom lens satisfies:
  • the maximum light aperture d of the lens included in each lens group in the zoom lens satisfies:
  • the difference between the chief ray angle when the zoom lens is in the wide-angle end state and the chief ray angle when the zoom lens is in the telephoto state is less than or equal to 6°.
  • the object distance range of the zoom lens can range from infinity to 40 mm.
  • the ratio range of the half image height IMH of the zoom lens to the effective focal length ft at the telephoto end satisfies: 0.02 ⁇
  • the effective focal length ft at the telephoto end and the effective focal length fw at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens satisfies: 1 ⁇
  • a camera module which includes a camera chip and the zoom lens described in any one of the above; wherein light can pass through the zoom lens and irradiate the camera chip.
  • Zooming is achieved by setting the second lens group, and the third lens group is provided for focal length compensation to achieve focusing, achieving the purpose of continuous zooming, and improving the shooting quality of the zoom lens.
  • a mobile terminal may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or the like.
  • the mobile terminal includes a housing, and any one of the above-mentioned zoom lenses arranged in the housing. Zooming is achieved by setting the second lens group, and the third lens group is provided for focal length compensation to achieve focusing, achieving the purpose of continuous zooming, and improving the shooting quality of the zoom lens.
  • FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a cross-sectional view of a mobile terminal to which a zoom lens provided in an embodiment of the present application is applied;
  • Fig. 2 exemplarily shows a zoom lens with three lens groups provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Fig. 3 exemplarily shows a structural diagram of one lens of the first lens group in Fig. 2;
  • Figure 4 exemplarily shows the first specific zoom lens
  • FIG. 5 shows the zooming process of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4
  • Fig. 6a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 4 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 6b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 4 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 6c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 6d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 7a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 7b shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 4 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 7c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 7d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 8a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 8b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 9a shows an optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 4 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 9b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • Fig. 10a shows an optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 4 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 10b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 11a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 11b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 in the telephoto state T;
  • Figure 12 exemplarily shows a second specific zoom lens
  • FIG. 13 shows a zooming process of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 12;
  • Fig. 14a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 14b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 12 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • Fig. 14c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • Fig. 14d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 15a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 12 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 15b shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • Fig. 15c shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 15d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 12 in the telephoto state T;
  • Fig. 16a shows an optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 16b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 12 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 17a shows an optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 17b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 12 in the first intermediate focal length state M1 state
  • FIG. 18a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 12 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 18b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 12 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 19a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 12 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 19b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 12 in the telephoto state T;
  • Fig. 20 exemplarily shows a third specific zoom lens
  • FIG. 21 shows a zooming process of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20
  • FIG. 22a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 22b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 20 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • Fig. 22c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 20 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • Fig. 22d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 20 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 23a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 23b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 23c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 23d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 24a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 24b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 25a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the first intermediate focal length state M1 state
  • FIG. 25b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 26a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 26b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 27a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 27b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the telephoto state T;
  • Fig. 28 exemplarily shows a fourth specific zoom lens
  • FIG. 29 shows a zooming process of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 28;
  • FIG. 30a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 28 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 30b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 28 in the intermediate focal length state M;
  • FIG. 30c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 28 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 31a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 28 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 31b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 28 in the intermediate focal length state M;
  • FIG. 31c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 28 in the telephoto state T;
  • Fig. 32a shows an optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 28 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 32b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 28 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 33a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 28 in the intermediate focal length state M;
  • Fig. 33b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 28 in the intermediate focal length state M state
  • FIG. 34a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 28 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 34b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 28 in the telephoto state T;
  • Fig. 35 exemplarily shows a fifth specific zoom lens
  • FIG. 36 shows a zooming process of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35;
  • FIG. 37a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 37b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 37c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 37d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 38a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 38b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • Fig. 38c shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 35 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 38d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 39a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 39b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 40a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 40b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the first intermediate focal length state M1 state
  • FIG. 41a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 41b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 42a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 42b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 in the telephoto state T;
  • Fig. 43 exemplarily shows a sixth specific zoom lens
  • FIG. 44 shows a zooming process of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43;
  • FIG. 45a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 45b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 45c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 45d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 46a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 46b shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 43 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 46c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 46d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 47a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 47b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 48a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the first intermediate focal length state M1 state
  • FIG. 48b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 49a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 49b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 50a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 50b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 51 exemplarily shows a seventh specific zoom lens
  • FIG. 52 shows a zooming process of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51;
  • FIG. 53a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 53b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 53c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 53d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51 in the telephoto state T;
  • Fig. 54a shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 51 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 54b shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 51 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • Fig. 54c shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 51 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • Fig. 54d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 51 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 55a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 55b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 56a shows an optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 51 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 56b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 57a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 57b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • Fig. 58a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 51 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 58b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51 in the telephoto state T;
  • Fig. 59 exemplarily shows an eighth specific zoom lens
  • FIG. 60 shows a zooming process of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59
  • Fig. 61a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 59 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 61b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • Fig. 61c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 59 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • Fig. 61d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 59 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 62a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 62b shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 59 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • Fig. 62c shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 59 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 62d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 63a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 63b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 64a shows an optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 59 in the first intermediate focal length state M1 state
  • Fig. 64b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 59 in the first intermediate focal length state M1 state
  • FIG. 65a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 65b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 66a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 66b shows the percentage of optical distortion of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59 in the telephoto state T;
  • Fig. 67 exemplarily shows a ninth specific zoom lens
  • FIG. 68 shows a zooming process of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67;
  • FIG. 69a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 69b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 69c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 69d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 70a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 70b shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 70c shows a lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 70d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 71a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • FIG. 71b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the wide-angle end state W;
  • Fig. 72a shows an optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 67 in the first intermediate focal length state M1;
  • FIG. 72b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the first intermediate focal length state M1 state
  • Fig. 73a shows an optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 67 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 73b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the second intermediate focal length state M2;
  • FIG. 74a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the telephoto state T;
  • FIG. 74b shows the optical distortion percentage of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 in the telephoto state T;
  • Figure 75 shows another zoom lens
  • FIG. 76 shows a schematic diagram of the application of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 60 in a mobile phone
  • Fig. 77 shows another zoom lens.
  • the positive power lens has a positive focal length and has the effect of condensing light
  • Negative power lens has a negative focal length and diverges light
  • a fixed lens group refers to a lens group with a fixed position in a zoom lens
  • the zoom lens group refers to the lens group of the zoom lens that is moved to adjust the focal length of the zoom lens
  • the compensation lens group refers to a lens group that moves in cooperation with the zoom lens group and is used to compensate the focus range of the zoom lens group;
  • the imaging surface is located on the image side of all the lenses in the zoom lens, and the carrying surface where light passes through each lens in the zoom lens in turn to form an image. Refer to Figure 2 for its position;
  • F-number F-number F-number/aperture is the relative value (the reciprocal of the relative aperture) derived from the focal length of the zoom lens/the clear diameter of the zoom lens.
  • the smaller the aperture F value the more light will enter in the same unit time. .
  • the larger the aperture F value the smaller the depth of field, and the background content of the photo will be blurred. Similar to the effect of a telephoto zoom lens;
  • TTL Total Track Length specifically refers to the total length from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface. TTL is the main factor that forms the height of the camera;
  • IMH image height Half-image height refers to the height from the edge of the image to the center of the image plane.
  • the zoom lens provided by the embodiments of the present application is applied to the camera module of a mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal may be Common mobile terminals such as mobile phones and tablet computers.
  • Figure 1 shows a cross-sectional view of the mobile phone. Refer to Figure 1, which shows a cross-sectional view of the mobile phone.
  • the lens 201 of the camera module 200 is fixed on the housing 100 of the mobile terminal.
  • the camera chip 202 is fixed in the housing 100.
  • the camera module 200 in the prior art often adopts a jump-type digital zoom, that is, by carrying multiple (such as 2 to 3) lenses with different focal lengths, combined with an algorithm-based digital zoom to achieve hybridization.
  • Optical zoom however, the jump digital zoom is based on multiple cameras with different focal lengths, which rely on algorithm processing to achieve continuous zooming, which is not a continuous zoom in the true sense. The sharpness of imaging is poor in certain focal length ranges.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a zoom lens.
  • Fig. 2 exemplarily shows a zoom lens with three lens groups provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the zoom lens includes three lens groups, namely the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G3 along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 has a negative
  • the second lens group G2 is a lens group with positive refractive power
  • the third lens group G3 is a lens group with negative refractive power
  • the lens group with positive refractive power has a positive focal length and has The effect of condensing light
  • the negative power lens group has a negative focal length and can diverge the light.
  • the first lens group G1 is a fixed lens group, such as being fixed in position relative to the housing 100 in FIG. 1, that is, relative to the position between the imaging surfaces;
  • the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 are movable along the optical axis of the zoom lens with respect to the first lens group G1.
  • the second lens group G2 can slide along the optical axis of the zoom lens on the image side of the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 can slide along the optical axis of the zoom lens on the image side of the second lens group G2; wherein ,
  • the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group to adjust the focal length to achieve zooming, and the third lens group G3 is used as a compensation lens group to fine-tune the focal length to achieve focusing. For this reason, the second lens group G2 has a larger stroke relative to the third lens group G3.
  • FIG. 3 shows a lens 10 of the first lens group G1 in FIG. 2, where d is the maximum clear aperture of the lens 10, and h is the height of the lens 10; where the maximum clear aperture d refers to the lens 10 The maximum diameter.
  • the opposite sides of the lens 10 (or one of the sides) have cuts 11 to reduce the height of the lens 10 so that h is smaller than d.
  • each lens in the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G3 adopts a lens structure similar to that shown in FIG. Increasing the amount of light can reduce the size in the height direction compared to the use of a circular lens with a diameter of d.
  • the maximum clear aperture of the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G3 satisfies: 4mm ⁇ maximum clear aperture d ⁇ 12mm, the maximum clear aperture of the lenses in the above lens group may be 4mm, Sizes such as 8mm, 8.8mm, 9.6mm, 9.888mm, 10mm, and 12mm, so that the zoom lens can balance the amount of light and the space occupied by the lens.
  • the lenses of each lens group have a notch similar to the notch 11 in the lens 10.
  • the vertical height of each lens satisfies: 4mm ⁇
  • the vertical height is less than or equal to 6mm, for example, the vertical height can be 4mm, 5mm, 6mm, etc., to reduce the height of the zoom lens, so that the zoom lens can be used in scenes with small spaces such as mobile phones.
  • Fig. 4 exemplarily shows the first specific zoom lens
  • the zoom lens sequentially includes from the object side to the image side: a first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the focal length f1 and the focal length of the lens telephoto end
  • 0.579
  • 0.293
  • 0.308.
  • the zoom lens includes 8 lenses with optical powers, including 10 aspherical surfaces in total.
  • the first lens group G1 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the optical powers are sequentially Positive and negative;
  • the second lens group G2 includes four lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the refractive powers are positive, positive, negative, and positive.
  • the third lens group G3 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side. The optical power of the lens is positive and negative in turn.
  • the above-mentioned second lens group G2 includes at least one negative power lens to eliminate aberrations; and the zoom lens also has a diaphragm (not shown in the figure), which is located on the object side of G2 of the second lens group, but It is not limited to this, it can also be arranged on the image side or the object side of the first lens group G1, or the image side or the object side of the third lens group G3; the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G1.
  • the maximum clear aperture of the lens in the lens group G3 is 9.888mm.
  • Table 1a shows the surface curvature, thickness (Thickness), refractive index (nd) and Abbe number (vd) of the zoom lens shown in Figure 4 in the wide-angle state.
  • R1 to R16 in the header on the left refer to the 16 surfaces of the above 8 lenses from the object side to the image side.
  • R1 refers to the object side surface of the first lens from the object side
  • R2 refers to the object side surface of the first lens from the object side.
  • the image side surface of the first lens from the object side refers to the object side surface of the second lens from the object side
  • R4 refers to the image side surface of the second lens from the object side...and so on
  • R in the header represents the curvature of the corresponding lens surface
  • d1 to d8 refer to the thickness of the eight lenses from the object side to the image side in order, in mm
  • a1 to a8 refer to the thickness from the object side in turn
  • the distance between every two adjacent lenses (or lens and imaging surface) to the image side For example, a1 refers to the gap between the first lens and the second lens, and a2 refers to the second lens to the second lens.
  • a8 refers to the size of the gap between the eighth lens and the imaging surface, in mm; n1 to n8 refer to 8 from the object side to the image side in turn The refractive index of each lens; v1 to v8 refer to the Abbe coefficients of the eight lenses from the object side to the image side in turn.
  • Table 1b shows the aspheric coefficient of the aspheric surface of each lens.
  • z is the vector height of the aspheric surface
  • r is the radial coordinate of the aspheric surface
  • c is the spherical curvature of the aspheric surface
  • K is the quadric constant
  • A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6 are the aspheric coefficients.
  • the design freedom of the aspheric surface is relatively high, and a better aspheric surface type can be designed according to actual needs to improve the imaging quality.
  • the light transmission adopts the structure of the zoom lens shown in Figure 4.
  • the ratio between the total length of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface TTL and the effective focal length ft of the telephoto end of the zoom lens can be achieved : 0.912, can use a smaller total optical length to achieve a longer focal length; the ratio of the semi-image height IMH of the zoom lens to the effective focal length ft at the telephoto end
  • can be 0.08955.
  • the position of the first lens group G1 relative to the imaging surface is fixed, and the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move along the optical axis to achieve continuous zooming.
  • FIG. 5 shows the zooming process of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4.
  • the zoom lens has four focal length states: W represents the wide-angle end state, M1 represents the first intermediate focal length state, M2 represents the second intermediate focal length state, and T represents the telephoto state.
  • the second lens group G2 When zooming from the first intermediate focal length state M1 to the second intermediate focal length state M2, the second lens group G2 continues to move in the direction of the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move in the direction of the second lens group G2;
  • the second intermediate focal length state M2 zooms to the telephoto state T, the second lens group G2 continues to move toward the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move toward the second lens group G2.
  • both the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move all the way to the object side, but the third lens group G3 is in the second lens group G2.
  • the distance between them decreases first and then increases to achieve continuous zooming.
  • the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the ratio between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface
  • is 0.26178;
  • the third lens group G3 is used as a compensation lens group.
  • is 0.256.
  • Table 1c shows the basic parameters of the zoom lens
  • Table 1d is the distance between the lens groups of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T.
  • the zoom lens shown in FIG. 4 is simulated, and the imaging effect of the zoom lens will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
  • Fig. 6a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 4 in the wide-angle end state W, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 2.2621mm.
  • Fig. 6b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 4 in the first intermediate focal length state M1, in which the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 6c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 4 in the second intermediate focal length state M2, wherein the five curves respectively indicate the 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 6d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 4 in the telephoto state T, in which the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 3.2830mm.
  • Figure 7a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength respectively, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 7a that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 7b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 7b that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 7c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, where the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths, the maximum The field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 7c that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 7d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, where the five solid curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm respectively, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 7d that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 8a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W state, indicating the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, respectively.
  • the dashed line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 8a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 8a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 8b. It can be seen from Figure 8b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 2.2% In the range.
  • Figure 9a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, representing the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 9a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 9a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 9b. It can be seen from Figure 9b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.06% In the range.
  • Figure 10a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, indicating the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 10a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 10a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 10b. It can be seen from Figure 10b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.6% In the range.
  • Figure 11a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, which represents the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, and The dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 11a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 11a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 11b. It can be seen from Figure 11b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.8% In the range.
  • Figure 12 exemplarily shows a second specific zoom lens.
  • the zoom lens includes in order from the object side to the image side: a first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the focal length f1 of which is the focal length of the telephoto end of the lens
  • the ratio of ft (that is, the focal length when the zoom lens is in the telephoto state):
  • 0.573;
  • 0.282;
  • 0.147.
  • the zoom lens includes 9 lenses with refractive powers, including 12 aspherical surfaces in total.
  • the first lens group G1 includes three lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the refractive powers are as follows Positive, positive and negative, and the first lens from the object side to the image side is a positive meniscus lens, and its convex surface is convex toward the object side;
  • the second lens group G2 includes four lenses distributed in sequence from the object side to the image side,
  • the refractive powers are positive, positive, negative, and positive in sequence.
  • the third lens group G3 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side in sequence, and the refractive powers are positive and negative in sequence.
  • the above-mentioned second lens group G2 includes at least one negative power lens to eliminate aberrations; and the zoom lens also has a diaphragm (not shown in the figure), which is located on the object side of G2 of the second lens group, but It is not limited to this, it can also be arranged on the image side or the object side of the first lens group G1, or the image side or the object side of the third lens group G3; the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G1.
  • the maximum clear aperture of the lens in the lens group G3 is 10 mm.
  • Table 2a shows the surface curvature, thickness (Thickness), refractive index (nd) and Abbe number (vd) of each lens of the zoom lens shown in Figure 12 in the wide-angle state.
  • Table 1b shows the aspheric coefficient of the aspheric surface of each lens.
  • all the even-order aspheric surface types z can be defined by but not limited to the following aspheric surface formula:
  • z is the vector height of the aspheric surface
  • r is the radial coordinate of the aspheric surface
  • c is the spherical curvature of the aspheric surface
  • K is the quadric constant
  • A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6 are the aspheric coefficients.
  • the design freedom of the aspheric surface is relatively high, and a better aspheric surface type can be designed according to actual needs to improve the image quality.
  • the light transmission adopts the structure of the zoom lens shown in Figure 12.
  • the ratio of the total length of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface TTL and the effective focal length ft of the telephoto end of the zoom lens can be achieved :0.973, a smaller total optical length can be used to achieve a longer focal length; the ratio of the semi-image height IMH of the zoom lens to the effective focal length ft at the telephoto end
  • can be 0.08988.
  • the position of the first lens group G1 relative to the imaging surface shown in FIG. 12 is fixed, and the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move along the optical axis to achieve continuous zooming.
  • Fig. 13 shows a zooming flow of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12.
  • the zoom lens has four focal length states: W represents the wide-angle end state, M1 represents the first intermediate focal length state, M2 represents the second intermediate focal length state, and T represents the telephoto state.
  • the second lens group G2 When zooming from the first intermediate focal length state M1 to the second intermediate focal length state M2, the second lens group G2 continues to move in the direction of the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move in the direction of the second lens group G2;
  • the second intermediate focal length state M2 zooms to the telephoto state T, the second lens group G2 continues to move toward the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move toward the second lens group G2.
  • both the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move all the way to the object side, but the third lens group G3 is in the second lens group G2.
  • the distance between them decreases first and then increases to achieve continuous zooming.
  • the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the ratio between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface
  • is 0.2454;
  • the third lens group G3 is used as a compensation lens group.
  • is 0.23512.
  • Table 2c shows the basic parameters of the zoom lens
  • Table 2d is the separation distance of the lens groups of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T.
  • the zoom lens shown in FIG. 12 is simulated, and the imaging effect of the zoom lens will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
  • Fig. 14a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12 in the wide-angle end state W, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 2.3651mm.
  • Fig. 14b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12 in the first intermediate focal length state M1, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, and 650nm when the half aperture is 2.3651mm.
  • Fig. 14c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12 in the second intermediate focal length state M2, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 14d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 12 in the telephoto state T, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 3.5230mm.
  • Figure 15a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range, as can be seen from Figure 15a, the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 15b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 15b that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 15c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, where the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dotted line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 15c that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 15d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, where the five solid curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm respectively, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 15d that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 16a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W state, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dashed line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 16a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 16a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 16b. It can be seen from Figure 16b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.8% In the range.
  • Figure 17a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 17a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 17a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 17b. It can be seen from Figure 17b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.3%. In the range.
  • Figure 18a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 18a that the gap between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 18a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 18b. It can be seen from Figure 18b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.6%. In the range.
  • Figure 19a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, which represents the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, and
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 19a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 19a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 19b. It can be seen from Figure 19b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.8% In the range.
  • FIG. 20 exemplarily shows a third specific zoom lens.
  • the zoom lens includes in order from the object side to the image side: a first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the focal length f1 of which is the focal length of the telephoto end of the lens
  • 0.605
  • the ratio of the focal length f2 of the second lens group G2 with positive refractive power to the focal length ft of the telephoto end of the lens
  • 0.283
  • 0.298.
  • the zoom lens includes 7 lenses with refractive powers, including 12 aspherical surfaces in total.
  • the first lens group G1 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the refractive powers are as follows Positive and negative, and the first lens from the object side to the image side is a positive meniscus lens, and its convex surface is convex toward the object side;
  • the second lens group G2 includes three lenses distributed in sequence from the object side to the image side, with refractive power The order is positive, negative and positive.
  • the third lens group G3 includes two lenses distributed in order from the object side to the image side, and the refractive powers are in order of positive and negative.
  • the above-mentioned second lens group G2 includes at least one negative power lens to eliminate aberrations; and the zoom lens also has a diaphragm (not shown in the figure), which is located on the object side of G2 of the second lens group, but It is not limited to this, it can also be arranged on the image side or the object side of the first lens group G1, or the image side or the object side of the third lens group G3; the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G1.
  • the maximum clear aperture of the lens in the lens group G3 is 8.8 mm.
  • Table 3a shows the surface curvature, thickness (Thickness), refractive index (nd) and Abbe number (vd) of each lens of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 in the wide-angle state. ;
  • the meaning of each parameter in Table 3a can refer to the corresponding part of Table 1a.
  • Table 3b shows the aspheric coefficient of the aspheric surface of each lens.
  • all the even-order aspheric surface types z can be defined by but not limited to the following aspheric surface formula:
  • z is the vector height of the aspheric surface
  • r is the radial coordinate of the aspheric surface
  • c is the spherical curvature of the aspheric surface
  • K is the quadric constant
  • A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6 are the aspheric coefficients.
  • the design freedom of the aspheric surface is relatively high, and a better aspheric surface type can be designed according to actual needs to improve the image quality.
  • is: 0.896, which is determined by It can be seen that a smaller total optical length can be used to achieve a longer focal length; the ratio of the semi-image height IMH of the zoom lens to the effective focal length ft at the telephoto end
  • can be 0.08961.
  • the position of the first lens group G1 relative to the imaging surface shown in FIG. 20 is fixed, and the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move along the optical axis to achieve continuous zooming.
  • FIG. 21 shows a zooming flow of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20.
  • the zoom lens has four focal length states: W represents the wide-angle end state, M1 represents the first intermediate focal length state, M2 represents the second intermediate focal length state, and T represents the telephoto state.
  • the second lens group G2 When zooming from the first intermediate focal length state M1 to the second intermediate focal length state M2, the second lens group G2 continues to move in the direction of the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move in the direction of the second lens group G2;
  • the second intermediate focal length state M2 zooms to the telephoto state T, the second lens group G2 continues to move toward the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move toward the second lens group G2.
  • both the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move all the way to the object side, but the third lens group G3 is in the second lens group G2.
  • the distance between them decreases first and then increases to achieve continuous zooming.
  • the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the ratio between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface
  • is 0.26667;
  • the third lens group G3 is used as a compensation lens group.
  • is 0.27883.
  • Table 3c shows the basic parameters of the zoom lens
  • Table 3d is the distance between the lens groups of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T.
  • the zoom lens shown in FIG. 20 is simulated, and the imaging effect of the zoom lens will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
  • Fig. 22a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 20 in the wide-angle end state W, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 2.3023mm.
  • Fig. 22b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 20 in the first intermediate focal length state M1, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 22c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 20 in the second intermediate focal length state M2, wherein the five curves respectively indicate the 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 22d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 20 in the telephoto state T, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 3.3048mm.
  • Figure 23a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, where the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 23a that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 23b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength, the maximum The field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 23b that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 23c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dotted line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 23c that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 23d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, where the five solid curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm respectively, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line represents the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 23d that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 24a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W state, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dashed line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 24a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 24a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 24b. It can be seen from Figure 24b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 1.6% In the range.
  • Figure 25a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 25a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 25a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 25b. It can be seen from Figure 25b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.4% In the range.
  • Figure 26a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Fig. 26a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Fig. 26a and the ideal shape is calculated as Fig. 26b. It can be seen from Fig. 26b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 1.2% In the range.
  • Figure 27a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, which represents the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, and
  • the dashed line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Fig. 27a that the gap between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Fig. 27a and the ideal shape is calculated as Fig. 27b. It can be seen from Fig. 27b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.4% In the range.
  • FIG. 28 exemplarily shows a fourth specific zoom lens.
  • the zoom lens includes in order from the object side to the image side: a first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, the focal length f1 of which is the focal length of the telephoto end of the lens
  • 0.796
  • the ratio of the focal length f2 of the second lens group G2 with positive refractive power to the focal length ft of the telephoto end of the lens
  • 0.309
  • 0.597.
  • the zoom lens includes 7 lenses with optical powers, including 12 aspherical surfaces in total.
  • the first lens group G1 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the optical powers are sequentially Positive and negative;
  • the second lens group G2 includes three lenses distributed in sequence from the object side to the image side, and the refractive powers are positive, positive and negative in sequence.
  • the third lens group G3 includes two lenses distributed in sequence from the object side to the image side. , The optical power is positive and negative in turn.
  • the above-mentioned second lens group G2 includes at least one negative power lens to eliminate aberrations; and the zoom lens also has a diaphragm (not shown in the figure), which is located on the object side of G2 of the second lens group, but It is not limited to this, it can also be arranged on the image side or the object side of the first lens group G1, or the image side or the object side of the third lens group G3; the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G1.
  • the maximum clear aperture of the lens in the lens group G3 is 9.788 mm.
  • Table 4a shows the surface curvature, thickness (Thickness), refractive index (nd) and Abbe number (vd) of each lens of the zoom lens shown in Figure 28 in the wide-angle state.
  • Table 4b shows the aspheric coefficient of the aspheric surface of each lens.
  • all the even-order aspheric surface types z can be defined by but not limited to the following aspheric surface formula:
  • z is the vector height of the aspheric surface
  • r is the radial coordinate of the aspheric surface
  • c is the spherical curvature of the aspheric surface
  • K is the quadric constant
  • A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6 are the aspheric coefficients.
  • the design freedom of the aspheric surface is relatively high, and a better aspheric surface type can be designed according to actual needs to improve the image quality.
  • is 1.15, which is determined by It can be seen that a smaller total optical length can be used to achieve a longer focal length; the ratio of the half image height IMH of the zoom lens to the effective focal length ft at the telephoto end can be 0.139.
  • the position of the first lens group G1 relative to the imaging surface shown in FIG. 28 is fixed, and the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move along the optical axis to achieve continuous zooming.
  • Fig. 29 shows a zooming flow of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 28.
  • the zoom lens has three focal length states: W represents the wide-angle end state, M represents the intermediate focal length state, and T represents the telephoto state.
  • the zoom lens zooms from the wide-angle end state W to the intermediate focal length state M
  • the second lens group G2 moves to the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 moves to the second lens group G2.
  • zooming from the intermediate focal length state M to the telephoto state T the second lens group G2 continues to move toward the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move toward the second lens group G2.
  • both the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move all the way to the object side, but the third lens group G3 is in the second lens group G2.
  • the distance between them decreases first and then increases to achieve continuous zooming.
  • the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the ratio between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface
  • is 0.1988;
  • the third lens group G3 is used as a compensation lens group.
  • is 0.222.
  • Table 4c shows the basic parameters of the zoom lens
  • Table 4d is the separation distance of the lens groups of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the intermediate focal length state M, and the telephoto state T.
  • the zoom lens shown in FIG. 28 is simulated, and the imaging effect of the zoom lens will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
  • Fig. 30a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 28 in the wide-angle end state W, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 2.3931mm.
  • Fig. 30b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 28 in the intermediate focal length state M.
  • the five curves represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the half-aperture size is 2.8062mm.
  • Fig. 30c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 28 in the telephoto state T, wherein the five curves represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 3.1856mm.
  • Figure 31a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength, the maximum field of view 4.0000mm, the dashed line represents the diffraction limit range, as can be seen from Figure 31a, the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 31b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the intermediate focal length state M, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength respectively, the maximum field of view 4.0000mm, the dashed line represents the diffraction limit range, as can be seen from Figure 31b, the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 31c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, where the five solid curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm respectively, the maximum field of view 4.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 31c that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 32a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W state, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, respectively.
  • the dashed line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 32a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 32a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 32b. It can be seen from Figure 32b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 3.0% In the range.
  • Figure 33a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the intermediate focal length state M, which represents the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, and The dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Fig. 33a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Fig. 33a and the ideal shape is calculated as Fig. 33b. From Fig. 33b, it can be seen that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 1.2% In the range.
  • Figure 34a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, which represents the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, and The dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 34a that the gap between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 34a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 34b. It can be seen from Figure 34b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.4% In the range.
  • the zoom lens includes the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G3 has been exemplarily described. ; Contains the form of three lens groups but is not limited to the above specific form.
  • the ratio of the focal length of each lens group to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the zoom lens is not limited to the values in the specific embodiments provided in FIGS. 4 to 34b, as long as the focal length of each lens group and the focal length of the zoom lens at the telephoto end meet
  • the following ratio relationship can achieve continuous zooming; for example, the focal length f1 of the first lens group G1 and the focal length ft of the zoom lens telephoto end satisfy: 0.2 ⁇
  • each lens group may include one, two, or more than two lenses.
  • the total number N of lenses in the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G3 needs to satisfy: 7 ⁇ N ⁇ 11 to ensure that the zoom lens has a better continuous zoom capability and imaging effect.
  • N can be exemplarily different positive integers such as 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11.
  • the lenses included in the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G3 satisfy: N ⁇ the number of aspheric surfaces ⁇ 2N, where the number of aspheric surfaces refers to the first lens group G1, the number of aspheric surfaces in all the lenses included in the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3, N is the number of lenses in the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G3
  • the total number for example, the number of aspheric surfaces can be N, 1.2N, 1.5N, 1.7N, 2N, and so on.
  • the aspheric surface is a transparent surface of the lens.
  • the second lens group G2 moves along the optical axis L1 and the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side
  • are only exemplary.
  • the ratio between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface satisfies: 0.12 ⁇
  • the ratio between the movement stroke L2 of the third lens group G3 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface satisfies: 0.08 ⁇
  • the light-passing second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 can cooperate with each other to achieve The purpose of continuous zoom.
  • satisfies: 0.8 ⁇
  • satisfies: 0.02 ⁇
  • it can be 0.02, 0.05, 0.07, 0.12, 0.15, 0.18, 0.20, and so on.
  • the effective focal length ft of the telephoto end of the zoom lens and the effective focal length fw of the wide-angle end satisfy: 1 ⁇
  • a fourth lens group G4 can be added to the zoom lens with three lens groups shown in Figure 2, and the relevant parameter values can be adjusted adaptively to maintain continuous zooming.
  • the fourth lens group G4 is located on the image side of the third lens group G3, and the fourth lens group G4 is a lens group with positive refractive power; the fourth lens group G4 is a lens group fixed with respect to the imaging surface; as a zoom lens
  • the second lens group G2 of the group and the third lens group G3 as a compensation lens group move between the first lens group G1 and the fourth lens group G4 along the optical axis of the zoom lens.
  • each lens in the fourth lens group G4 can also adopt a lens structure similar to that shown in FIG. 3 to increase the amount of light passing and reduce the size in the height direction.
  • the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, the third lens group G3, and the fourth lens group G4 include the maximum clear aperture of the lenses: 4mm ⁇ maximum clear aperture d ⁇ 12mm, so that the zoom lens can be balanced The amount of light and the space occupied by the lens.
  • the lenses in the fourth lens group G4 may also have a cutout similar to the cutout 11 in the lens 10 (FIG. 3), the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, the third lens group G3, and the fourth lens group G4.
  • the height of each lens in the vertical direction satisfies: 4mm ⁇ vertical height ⁇ 6mm to reduce the height of the zoom lens.
  • FIG. 35 exemplarily shows a fifth specific zoom lens.
  • the zoom lens includes in order from the object side to the image side: a first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, and its focal length f1 is the same as the focal length of the telephoto end of the lens.
  • 0.556; the second lens group G2 with positive refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f2 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.241; those with negative refractive power
  • 0.211; the ratio of the focal length f4 of the fourth lens group G4 with positive refractive power to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens :
  • 0.286.
  • the zoom lens includes 9 lenses with refractive powers, including 16 aspherical surfaces in total.
  • the first lens group G1 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the refractive powers are as follows Positive and negative, and the first lens from the object side to the image side is a positive meniscus lens, and its convex surface is convex toward the object side;
  • the second lens group G2 includes four lenses distributed in order from the object side to the image side, and the refractive power The order is positive, positive, negative and positive.
  • the third lens group G3 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side in order, with positive and negative refractive powers;
  • the fourth lens group G4 includes one lens with positive refractive power. .
  • the above-mentioned second lens group G2 includes at least one negative power lens to eliminate aberrations; and the zoom lens also has a diaphragm (not shown in the figure), which is located on the object side of G2 of the second lens group, but It is not limited to this, it can also be arranged on the image side or the object side of the first lens group G1, or the image side or the object side of the third lens group G3; the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G1.
  • the maximum clear aperture of the lens in the lens group G3 is 9.6 mm.
  • Table 5a shows the surface curvature, thickness (Thickness), refractive index (nd) and Abbe number (vd) of each lens of the zoom lens shown in Figure 35 in the wide-angle state.
  • Table 5b shows the aspheric coefficient of the aspheric surface of each lens.
  • all even-order aspheric surface types z can be defined by but not limited to the following aspheric surface formula:
  • z is the vector height of the aspheric surface
  • r is the radial coordinate of the aspheric surface
  • c is the spherical curvature of the aspheric surface
  • K is the quadric constant
  • A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6 are the aspheric coefficients.
  • the design freedom of the aspheric surface is relatively high, and a better aspheric surface type can be designed according to actual needs to improve the image quality.
  • 0.97, which is determined by It can be seen that a smaller total optical length can be used to achieve a longer focal length; the ratio of the half-image height IMH of the zoom lens to the effective focal length ft at the telephoto end can be 0.08955.
  • the first lens group G1 and the fourth lens group G4 are both fixed in position relative to the imaging surface, and the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 are located between the first lens group G1 and the fourth lens group G4. It moves along the optical axis, where the second lens group G2 serves as a zoom lens group, and the third lens group G3 serves as a compensation lens group to achieve continuous zooming.
  • Fig. 36 shows a zooming flow of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 35.
  • the zoom lens has four focal length states: W represents the wide-angle end state, M1 represents the first intermediate focal length state, M2 represents the second intermediate focal length state, and T represents the telephoto state.
  • the second lens group G2 When zooming from the first intermediate focal length state M1 to the second intermediate focal length state M2, the second lens group G2 continues to move in the direction of the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move in the direction of the second lens group G2;
  • the second intermediate focal length state M2 zooms to the telephoto state T, the second lens group G2 continues to move toward the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move toward the second lens group G2.
  • both the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move all the way to the object side, but the third lens group G3 is in the second lens group G2.
  • the distance between them decreases first and then increases to achieve continuous zooming.
  • the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the ratio between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface
  • is 0.24615;
  • the third lens group G3 is used as a compensating lens group.
  • is 0.17871.
  • Table 5c shows the basic parameters of the zoom lens
  • Table 5d is the distance between the lens groups of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T
  • Table 5e shows the values of chief ray angles (CRA values) of different fields of view of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T.
  • the number in the left column Represents different fields of view.
  • the zoom lens shown in FIG. 35 is simulated, and the imaging effect of the zoom lens will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
  • Fig. 37a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 35 in the wide-angle end state W, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 2.2529mm.
  • Fig. 37b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 35 in the first intermediate focal length state M1, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 37c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 35 in the second intermediate focal length state M2, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 37d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 35 in the telephoto state T, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 3.3225mm.
  • Figure 38a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 38a that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 38b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dotted line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 38b that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 38c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 38c that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 38d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, where the five solid curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm, respectively, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 38d that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 39a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W state, indicating the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, respectively.
  • the dashed line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Fig. 39a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Fig. 39a and the ideal shape is calculated as Fig. 39b. It can be seen from Fig. 39b that the optical distortion can be controlled to be less than or equal to Within 3%.
  • Figure 40a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 40a that the gap between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 40a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 40b. It can be seen from Figure 40b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.8% In the range.
  • Figure 41a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, indicating the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 41a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 41a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 41b. It can be seen from Figure 41b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.5% In the range.
  • Figure 42a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, which represents the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, and
  • the dashed line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 42a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 42a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 42b. It can be seen from Figure 42b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.8% In the range.
  • FIG. 43 exemplarily shows a sixth specific zoom lens.
  • the zoom lens includes in order from the object side to the image side: a first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, and its focal length f1 is the same as the focal length of the telephoto end of the lens.
  • 0.579; the second lens group G2 with positive refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f2 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.260; those with negative refractive power
  • 0.205; the ratio of the focal length of the fourth lens group G4 with positive refractive power to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens :
  • 0.307.
  • the zoom lens includes 8 lenses with refractive powers, including 14 aspherical surfaces in total.
  • the first lens group G1 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the refractive powers are as follows Positive and negative, and the first lens from the object side to the image side is a positive meniscus lens, and its convex surface is convex toward the object side;
  • the second lens group G2 includes three lenses distributed in sequence from the object side to the image side, with refractive power The order is positive, negative and positive.
  • the third lens group G3 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the refractive power is positive and negative in turn;
  • the fourth lens group G4 includes one lens with positive refractive power.
  • the above-mentioned second lens group G2 includes at least one negative power lens for eliminating aberrations; and the zoom lens also has a diaphragm (not shown in the figure), which is located on the object side of G2 of the second lens group. But it is not limited to this, it can also be arranged on the image side or the object side of the first lens group G1, or the image side or the object side of the third lens group G3; the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the second lens group G1.
  • the maximum clear aperture of the lens in the three-lens group G3 is 9.6mm.
  • Table 6a shows the surface curvature, thickness (Thickness), refractive index (nd) and Abbe number (vd) of each lens of the zoom lens shown in Figure 43 in the wide-angle state.
  • Table 6b shows the aspheric coefficient of the aspheric surface of each lens.
  • all the even-order aspheric surface types z can be defined by but not limited to the following aspheric surface formula:
  • z is the vector height of the aspheric surface
  • r is the radial coordinate of the aspheric surface
  • c is the spherical curvature of the aspheric surface
  • K is the quadric constant
  • A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6 are the aspheric coefficients.
  • the design freedom of the aspheric surface is relatively high, and a better aspheric surface type can be designed according to actual needs to improve the imaging quality.
  • is 0.955, which is determined by It can be seen that a smaller total optical length can be used to achieve a longer focal length; the ratio of the half-image height IMH of the zoom lens to the effective focal length ft at the telephoto end
  • can be 0.08955.
  • the first lens group G1 and the fourth lens group G4 are both fixed in position relative to the imaging surface, and the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 are located between the first lens group G1 and the fourth lens group G4. It moves along the optical axis, where the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the third lens group G3 is used as a compensation lens group to achieve continuous zooming.
  • FIG. 44 shows a zoom flow of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43.
  • the zoom lens has four focal length states: W represents the wide-angle end state, M1 represents the first intermediate focal length state, M2 represents the second intermediate focal length state, and T represents the telephoto state.
  • the second lens group G2 When zooming from the first intermediate focal length state M1 to the second intermediate focal length state M2, the second lens group G2 continues to move in the direction of the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move in the direction of the second lens group G2;
  • the second intermediate focal length state M2 zooms to the telephoto state T, the second lens group G2 continues to move toward the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move toward the second lens group G2.
  • both the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move all the way to the object side, but the third lens group G3 is in the second lens group G2.
  • the distance between them decreases first and then increases to achieve continuous zooming.
  • the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the ratio between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface
  • is 0.25016;
  • the third lens group G3 is used as a compensation lens group.
  • is 0.20385.
  • Table 6c shows the basic parameters of the zoom lens
  • Table 6d is the distance between the lens groups of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T.
  • Table 6e shows the values of chief ray angles (CRA values) of different fields of view of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T, respectively.
  • CRA values chief ray angles
  • the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 is simulated, and the imaging effect of the zoom lens will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
  • Fig. 45a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 43 in the wide-angle end state W, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 2.3197mm.
  • FIG. 45b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 43 in the first intermediate focal length state M1, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 45c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 43 in the second intermediate focal length state M2, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 45d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 43 in the telephoto state T, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the half-aperture size is 3.4027mm.
  • Figure 46a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength, respectively, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 46a that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 46b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 46b that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 46c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 46c that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 46d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength respectively, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 46d that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 47a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W state, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, respectively.
  • the dashed line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 47a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 47a and the ideal shape is calculated to obtain Figure 47b. It can be seen from Figure 47b that the optical distortion can be controlled to be less than or equal to Within 3%.
  • Figure 48a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 48a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 48a and the ideal shape is calculated to obtain Figure 48b. It can be seen from Figure 48b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.8% In the range.
  • Figure 49a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 49a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 49a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 49b. It can be seen from Figure 49b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 1.2% In the range.
  • Figure 50a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, which represents the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, and
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 50a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 50a and the ideal shape is calculated to obtain Figure 50b. It can be seen from Figure 50b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 1.2% In the range.
  • FIG. 51 exemplarily shows a seventh specific zoom lens.
  • the zoom lens includes in order from the object side to the image side: a first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, and its focal length f1 is the same as the focal length of the telephoto end of the lens.
  • 0.634; the second lens group G2 with positive refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f2 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.228; with negative refractive power
  • 0.171; the ratio of the focal length f4 of the fourth lens group G4 with a positive refractive power to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens :
  • 0.570.
  • the zoom lens includes 10 lenses with refractive powers, including 18 aspherical surfaces in total.
  • the first lens group G1 includes three lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the refractive powers are as follows Positive, positive and negative;
  • the second lens group G2 includes four lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the refractive powers are positive, positive, negative, and positive.
  • the third lens group G3 includes four lenses distributed from the object side to the image side. The two lenses of, the refractive power is negative and negative in turn;
  • the fourth lens group G4 includes one lens, the refractive power is positive.
  • the above-mentioned second lens group G2 includes at least one negative power lens to eliminate aberrations; and the zoom lens also has a diaphragm (not shown in the figure), which is located on the object side of G2 of the second lens group. But it is not limited to this, it can also be arranged on the image side or the object side of the first lens group G1, or the image side or the object side of the third lens group G3; the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the second lens group G1.
  • the maximum clear aperture of the lens in the three-lens group G3 is 9mm.
  • Table 7a shows the surface curvature, thickness (Thickness), refractive index (nd) and Abbe number (vd) of each lens of the zoom lens shown in Figure 51 in the wide-angle state.
  • Table 7b shows the aspheric coefficient of the aspheric surface of each lens.
  • z is the vector height of the aspheric surface
  • r is the radial coordinate of the aspheric surface
  • c is the spherical curvature of the aspheric apex
  • K is the quadric constant
  • A2, A3, A4, A5, A6 and A7 are the aspheric coefficients.
  • the design freedom of the aspheric surface is relatively high, and a better aspheric surface type can be designed according to actual needs to improve the image quality.
  • the ratio of the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface and the effective focal length ft of the telephoto end of the zoom lens is 0.904, thus It can be seen that a smaller total optical length can be used to achieve a longer focal length; the ratio of the semi-image height IMH of the zoom lens to the effective focal length ft at the telephoto end
  • can be 0.08955.
  • the first lens group G1 and the fourth lens group G4 are both fixed relative to the imaging surface.
  • the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 are located between the first lens group G1 and the fourth lens group G4. It moves along the optical axis, where the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the third lens group G3 is used as a compensation lens group to achieve continuous zooming.
  • Fig. 52 shows a zooming flow of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 51.
  • the zoom lens has four focal length states: W represents the wide-angle end state, M1 represents the first intermediate focal length state, M2 represents the second intermediate focal length state, and T represents the telephoto state.
  • the second lens group G2 When zooming from the first intermediate focal length state M1 to the second intermediate focal length state M2, the second lens group G2 continues to move in the direction of the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move in the direction of the second lens group G2;
  • the second intermediate focal length state M2 zooms to the telephoto state T, the second lens group G2 continues to move toward the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move toward the second lens group G2.
  • both the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move all the way to the object side, but the third lens group G3 is in the second lens group G2.
  • the distance between them decreases first and then increases to achieve continuous zooming.
  • the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the ratio between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface
  • is 0.26403;
  • the third lens group G3 is used as a compensating lens group.
  • is 0.24389.
  • Table 7c shows the basic parameters of the zoom lens
  • Table 7d is the distance between the lens groups of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T.
  • Table 7e shows the values of chief ray angles (CRA values) of different fields of view of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T, respectively.
  • CRA values chief ray angles
  • the zoom lens shown in FIG. 51 is simulated, and the imaging effect of the zoom lens will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
  • Fig. 53a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 51 in the wide-angle end state W, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 2.4136mm.
  • Fig. 53b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 51 in the first intermediate focal length state M1, in which the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 53c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 51 in the second intermediate focal length state M2, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 53d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 51 in the telephoto state T, in which the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the half-aperture size is 3.4631mm.
  • Figure 54a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 54a that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 54b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 54b that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 54c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 54c that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 54d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, where the five solid curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm, respectively, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 54d that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 55a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W state, indicating the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, respectively.
  • the dashed line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 55a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 55a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 55b. It can be seen from Figure 55b that the optical distortion can be controlled to be less than or equal to Within 1.2%.
  • Figure 56a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 56a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 56a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 56b. It can be seen from Figure 56b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 2.5% In the range.
  • Figure 57a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 57a that the gap between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 57a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 57b. It can be seen from Figure 57b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 2.0% In the range.
  • Figure 58a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, which represents the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, and The dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Fig. 58a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Fig. 58a and the ideal shape is calculated as Fig. 58b. It can be seen from Fig. 58b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 1.2% In the range.
  • Fig. 59 exemplarily shows an eighth specific zoom lens.
  • the zoom lens includes in order from the object side to the image side: a first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, and its focal length f1 is equal to the focal length of the telephoto end of the lens.
  • 0.447; the second lens group G2 with positive refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f2 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.217; those with negative refractive power
  • 0.202; the ratio of the focal length f4 of the fourth lens group G4 with positive refractive power to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens :
  • 0.881.
  • the zoom lens includes 10 lenses with refractive powers, including 16 aspherical surfaces in total.
  • the first lens group G1 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the refractive powers are as follows Positive and negative, and the first lens is a positive meniscus lens with a convex surface convex toward the object side;
  • the second lens group G2 includes four lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the refractive powers are positive, positive, negative, and positive.
  • the third lens group G3 includes three lenses distributed in sequence from the object side to the image side, and the refractive power is sequentially negative, positive and negative;
  • the fourth lens group G4 includes one lens with positive refractive power.
  • the above-mentioned second lens group G2 includes at least one negative power lens to eliminate aberrations; and the zoom lens also has a diaphragm (not shown in the figure), which is located on the object side of G2 of the second lens group. But it is not limited to this, it can also be arranged on the image side or the object side of the first lens group G1, or the image side or the object side of the third lens group G3; the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the second lens group G1.
  • the maximum clear aperture of the lens in the three-lens group G3 is 8.168mm.
  • Table 8a shows the surface curvature, thickness (Thickness), refractive index (nd) and Abbe number (vd) of each lens of the zoom lens shown in Figure 59 in the wide-angle state.
  • Table 8b shows the aspheric coefficient of the aspheric surface of each lens.
  • all even-order aspheric surface types z can be defined by but not limited to the following aspheric surface formula:
  • z is the vector height of the aspheric surface
  • r is the radial coordinate of the aspheric surface
  • c is the spherical curvature of the aspheric apex
  • K is the quadric constant
  • A2, A3, A4, A5, A6 and A7 are the aspheric coefficients.
  • the design freedom of the aspheric surface is relatively high, and a better aspheric surface type can be designed according to actual needs to improve the image quality.
  • the ratio of the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface and the effective focal length ft of the telephoto end of the zoom lens is 0.881, thus It can be seen that a smaller total optical length can be used to achieve a longer focal length; the ratio of the semi-image height IMH of the zoom lens to the effective focal length ft at the telephoto end
  • can be 0.08955.
  • the first lens group G1 and the fourth lens group G4 are both fixed in position relative to the imaging surface, and the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 are located between the first lens group G1 and the fourth lens group G4. It moves along the optical axis, where the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the third lens group G3 is used as a compensation lens group to achieve continuous zooming.
  • FIG. 60 shows a zooming flow of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59.
  • the zoom lens has four focal length states: W represents the wide-angle end state, M1 represents the first intermediate focal length state, M2 represents the second intermediate focal length state, and T represents the telephoto state.
  • the second lens group G2 When zooming from the first intermediate focal length state M1 to the second intermediate focal length state M2, the second lens group G2 continues to move in the direction of the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move in the direction of the second lens group G2;
  • the second intermediate focal length state M2 zooms to the telephoto state T, the second lens group G2 continues to move toward the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move toward the second lens group G2.
  • both the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move all the way to the object side, but the third lens group G3 is in the second lens group G2.
  • the distance between them decreases first and then increases to achieve continuous zooming.
  • the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the ratio between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface
  • is 0.26919;
  • the third lens group G3 is used as a compensating lens group.
  • is 0.18505.
  • Table 8c shows the basic parameters of the zoom lens
  • Table 8d is the distance between the lens groups of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T.
  • Table 8e shows the values of chief ray angles (CRA values) of different fields of view of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T, respectively.
  • CRA values chief ray angles
  • the zoom lens shown in FIG. 59 is simulated, and the imaging effect of the zoom lens will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
  • Fig. 61a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 59 in the wide-angle end state W, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the half-aperture size is 2.0371mm.
  • Fig. 61b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 59 in the first intermediate focal length state M1, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 61c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 59 in the second intermediate focal length state M2, wherein the five curves respectively indicate 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 61d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 59 in the telephoto state T, where the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 3.1842mm.
  • Figure 62a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line represents the diffraction limit range, as can be seen from Figure 62a, the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 62b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, where the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths, the maximum The field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dotted line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Fig. 62b that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 62c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths, respectively.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 62c that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 62d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength respectively, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 62d that the lateral chromatic aberrations of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 63a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W state, indicating the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dashed line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Fig. 63a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Fig. 63a and the ideal shape is calculated as Fig. 63b. It can be seen from Fig. 63b that the optical distortion can be controlled to be less than or equal to Within 3%.
  • Figure 64a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, indicating the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 64a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 64a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 64b. It can be seen from Figure 64b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 1.2% In the range.
  • Figure 65a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 65a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 65a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 65b. It can be seen from Figure 65b that the optical distortion can be controlled to be less than or equal to Within 0.6%.
  • Figure 66a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, which represents the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, and The dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 66a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Figure 66a and the ideal shape is calculated as Figure 66b. It can be seen from Figure 66b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 0.7%. In the range.
  • FIG. 67 exemplarily shows a ninth specific zoom lens.
  • the zoom lens includes in order from the object side to the image side: a first lens group G1 with negative refractive power, and its focal length f1 is the same as the focal length of the telephoto end of the lens.
  • 0.71; the second lens group G2 with positive refractive power, the ratio of its focal length f2 to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens:
  • 0.23; those with negative refractive power
  • 0.335; the ratio of the focal length f4 of the fourth lens group G4 with positive refractive power to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the lens :
  • 0.384.
  • the zoom lens includes 8 lenses with optical power, including 16 aspherical surfaces in total.
  • the first lens group G1 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, and the optical powers are as follows Positive and negative, and the first lens is a positive meniscus lens with convex surface convex toward the object side;
  • the second lens group G2 includes two lenses distributed from the object side to the image side, the refractive powers are positive and negative in turn,
  • the third lens group G3 includes three lenses distributed in order from the object side to the image side, and the refractive power is positive, negative and positive in turn;
  • the fourth lens group G4 includes one lens with positive refractive power.
  • the above-mentioned second lens group G2 includes at least one negative power lens for eliminating aberrations; and the zoom lens also has a diaphragm (not shown in the figure), which is located on the object side of G2 of the second lens group. But it is not limited to this, it can also be arranged on the image side or the object side of the first lens group G1, or the image side or the object side of the third lens group G3; the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the second lens group G1.
  • the maximum clear aperture of the lens in the three-lens group G3 is 7.902mm.
  • Table 9a shows the surface curvature, thickness (Thickness), refractive index (nd) and Abbe number (vd) of each lens of the zoom lens shown in Figure 67 in the wide-angle state.
  • Table 9b shows the aspheric coefficient of the aspheric surface of each lens.
  • all the even-order aspheric surface types z can be defined by but not limited to the following aspheric surface formula:
  • z is the vector height of the aspheric surface
  • r is the radial coordinate of the aspheric surface
  • c is the spherical curvature of the aspheric apex
  • K is the quadric constant
  • A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7 and A8 are the aspheric coefficients .
  • the design freedom of the aspheric surface is relatively high, and a better aspheric surface type can be designed according to actual needs to improve the image quality.
  • is 0.95, thus It can be seen that a smaller total optical length can be used to achieve a longer focal length; the ratio of the half image height IMH of the zoom lens to the effective focal length ft at the telephoto end can be 0.144.
  • the first lens group G1 and the fourth lens group G4 are fixed relative to the imaging surface, and the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 are located between the first lens group G1 and the fourth lens group G4. It moves along the optical axis, where the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the third lens group G3 is used as a compensation lens group to achieve continuous zooming.
  • Fig. 68 shows a zooming flow of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 67.
  • the zoom lens has four focal length states: W represents the wide-angle end state, M1 represents the first intermediate focal length state, M2 represents the second intermediate focal length state, and T represents the telephoto state.
  • the second lens group G2 When zooming from the first intermediate focal length state M1 to the second intermediate focal length state M2, the second lens group G2 continues to move in the direction of the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move in the direction of the second lens group G2;
  • the second intermediate focal length state M2 zooms to the telephoto state T, the second lens group G2 continues to move toward the first lens group G1, and the third lens group G3 continues to move toward the second lens group G2.
  • both the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 move all the way to the object side, but the third lens group G3 is in the second lens group G2.
  • the distance between them decreases first and then increases to achieve continuous zooming.
  • the second lens group G2 is used as a zoom lens group, and the ratio between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface
  • is 0.2022;
  • the third lens group G3 is used as a compensation lens group.
  • is 0.1845.
  • Table 9c shows the basic parameters of the zoom lens
  • Table 9d is the distance between the lens groups of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, the first intermediate focal length state M1, the second intermediate focal length state M2, and the telephoto state T.
  • the zoom lens shown in FIG. 67 is simulated, and the imaging effect of the zoom lens will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
  • Fig. 69a shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 67 in the wide-angle end state W, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 2.2614mm.
  • Fig. 69b shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 67 in the first intermediate focal length state M1, wherein the five curves respectively indicate 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 69c shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 67 in the second intermediate focal length state M2, in which the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm,
  • Fig. 69d shows the axial aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Fig. 67 in the telephoto state T, wherein the five curves respectively represent 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 510nm when the semi-aperture size is 3.0036mm.
  • Figure 70a shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W, where the five solid-line curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelength respectively, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 70a that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays is basically within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 70b shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, in which the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 70b that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays is basically within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 70c shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, where the five solid-line curves in the figure are respectively the simulation curves corresponding to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm wavelengths.
  • the field of view is 3.0000mm, and the dashed line represents the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 70c that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays are all within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 70d shows the lateral chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, where the five solid curves in the figure are the simulation curves corresponding to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm and 470nm respectively, the maximum field of view 3.0000mm, the dashed line indicates the diffraction limit range. It can be seen from Figure 70d that the lateral chromatic aberration of the five rays is basically within the diffraction limit.
  • Figure 71a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the wide-angle end state W state, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dashed line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 71a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 71a and the ideal shape is calculated to obtain Figure 71b. It can be seen from Figure 71b that the optical distortion can be controlled to be less than or equal to Within 3%.
  • Figure 72a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the first intermediate focal length state M1, which represents the difference between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 72a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 72a and the ideal shape is calculated to obtain Figure 72b. It can be seen from Figure 72b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 2.0% In the range.
  • Figure 73a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the second intermediate focal length state M2, which represents the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light with wavelengths of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, and 470nm, respectively.
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Fig. 73a that the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging distortion of the light in Fig. 73a and the ideal shape is calculated to obtain Fig. 73b. It can be seen from Fig. 73b that the optical distortion can be controlled to be less than or equal to Within the range of 3.0%.
  • Figure 74a shows the optical distortion curve of the zoom lens in the telephoto state T, which represents the difference between the imaging distortion and the ideal shape.
  • the five solid-line curves correspond to the color light of 650nm, 610nm, 555nm, 510nm, 470nm wavelength, and
  • the dotted line corresponding to each solid line is the ideal shape corresponding to the light. It can be seen from Figure 74a that the gap between the imaging deformation and the ideal shape is very small.
  • the percentage of the imaging deformation of the light in Figure 74a and the ideal shape is calculated to obtain Figure 74b. It can be seen from Figure 74b that the optical distortion can be controlled to less than 3.0% In the range.
  • the zoom lens includes three lens groups: the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, the third lens group G3, and the fourth lens group G4 Illustrated exemplarily; however, the form including four lens groups is not limited to the above five specific embodiments.
  • the ratio of the focal length of each lens group to the focal length ft at the telephoto end of the zoom lens is not limited to the values in the specific embodiments provided in FIGS. 35 to 74b, as long as the focal length of each lens group and the focal length of the zoom lens at the telephoto end satisfy
  • the following ratio relationship can achieve continuous zooming; for example, the focal length f1 of the first lens group G1 and the focal length ft of the zoom lens telephoto end satisfy: 0.2 ⁇
  • each lens group in the four specific embodiments provided in FIGS. 35 to 74b is only exemplary, and the zoom lens provided in the embodiments of this application does not specify the specific number of lenses in each lens group.
  • the limitation is that only the total number N of lenses in the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, the third lens group G3, and the fourth lens group G4 is limited.
  • each lens group may include one, two, or more than two lenses.
  • the total number N of lenses in the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, the third lens group G3 and the fourth lens group G4 must meet: 7 ⁇ N ⁇ 13 to ensure that the zoom lens has a good continuous zooming ability And imaging effects.
  • N can be exemplarily different positive integers such as 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 13.
  • the lenses included in the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, the third lens group G3, and the fourth lens group G4 satisfy: N ⁇ the number of aspheric surfaces ⁇ 2N, where N is the first lens group G1
  • the total number of lenses in the second lens group G2, the third lens group G3, and the fourth lens group G4, the number of aspheric surfaces refers to the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group
  • the number of aspheric surfaces in all the lenses included in G3 and the fourth lens group G4, for example, the number of aspheric surfaces may be N, 1.2N, 1.5N, 1.7N, 2N, and so on.
  • the aspheric surface is a transparent surface of the lens.
  • the second lens group G2 moves along the optical axis L1 and the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side
  • are only exemplary.
  • the ratio between the movement stroke L1 of the second lens group G2 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface satisfies: 0.12 ⁇
  • the ratio between the movement stroke L2 of the third lens group G3 along the optical axis and the total length TTL of the zoom lens from the surface closest to the object side to the imaging surface satisfies: 0.08 ⁇
  • satisfies: 0.8 ⁇
  • satisfies: 0.02 ⁇
  • it may be 0.02, 0.05, 0.07, 0.12, 0.15, 0.18, 0.20, etc.
  • the effective focal length ft of the telephoto end of the zoom lens and the effective focal length fw of the wide-angle end satisfy: 1 ⁇
  • the zoom lens consists of the first specific zoom lens, the second specific zoom lens, the third specific zoom lens, the fourth specific zoom lens, the fifth specific zoom lens, the sixth specific zoom lens,
  • the structure and simulation effect of the seventh specific zoom lens, the eighth specific zoom lens, and the ninth specific zoom lens can be seen that the zoom lens provided by the embodiment of the application can zoom continuously, and the object distance range of the zoom lens The range from infinity to 40mm can be achieved.
  • the object distance refers to the distance from the object to the object side surface of the first lens in the first lens group G1 of the zoom lens. It can be seen from the simulation results that the zoom lens obtains a better imaging quality than the traditional hybrid optical zoom during the zooming process.
  • the difference between the chief ray angle when the zoom lens is in the wide-angle end state W and the chief ray angle when the zoom lens is in the telephoto state T is less than or equal to 6°, for example, the difference is 0.1°, 1°, 1.2°, 1.8°, 1.9 °, 2.2°, 2.5°, 2.8°, 3.2°, 3.5°, 4°, 4.4°, 4.8°, 5.0°, 5.5° and 6° etc.
  • FIG. 75 shows another zoom lens provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the lens group setting form of the zoom lens is not limited to the form in FIG.
  • the reflector 20 on the object side of the group G1 reflects light to the first lens group G1.
  • the mirror surface of the reflector 20 can form an angle of 45° with the optical axis of the zoom lens, and the angle can also be adjusted as required Therefore, periscope shooting can be realized, and the placement position and placement angle of the zoom lens can be more flexible.
  • the optical axis direction of the zoom lens can be parallel to the surface of the mobile phone screen.
  • Figure 76 shows the application scenario of the zoom lens in a mobile phone.
  • the arrangement direction of the lens group 301 in the zoom lens 300 may be parallel to the length direction of the mobile phone housing 400, and the lens group 301 is arranged between the mobile phone housing 300 and the middle frame 500.
  • FIG. 76 only illustrates the setting position and manner of the lens group 301, and the lens group 301 in FIG. 76 does not represent the actual number of lenses in the lens group 301. It can be seen from Figure 76 that when the zoom lens adopts the periscope type, the influence on the thickness of the mobile phone can be reduced.
  • the reflector 20 in FIG. 75 can be replaced with a prism 30.
  • the prism 30 can be a triangular prism.
  • One surface of the prism 30 is used as a reflective surface, and the reflective surface is aligned with the optical axis of the zoom lens.
  • the included angle of 45° can also be adjusted appropriately; continuing to refer to FIG. 77, for example, the light perpendicularly passes through an incident surface of the prism 30, reaches the reflective surface of the prism 30, and is reflected to the exit surface of the prism 30. It passes through the exit surface vertically and hits the first lens group G1; the shape and placement angle of the prism are not limited to the above forms, as long as the external light can be deflected to the first lens group G1.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a camera module, which includes a camera chip and the zoom lens provided in any of the above embodiments, and light can pass through the zoom lens to illuminate the camera chip.
  • the camera module has a housing, the camera chip is fixed in the housing, and the zoom lens is also arranged in the housing.
  • the housing and chip of the camera module can adopt existing known structures, which will not be repeated here.
  • the zoom lens uses the second lens group as the zoom lens group and the third lens group as the compensation lens group, and cooperates with the fixed first lens group to realize continuous zooming of the zoom lens and improve the shooting quality of the zoom lens.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a mobile terminal, which may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or the like.
  • the mobile terminal includes a housing, and the zoom lens provided in any of the foregoing specific embodiments arranged in the housing.
  • the zoom lens adopting the periscope type as shown in Figure 76 is set in the mobile phone.
  • the zoom lens shown in Figure 4 the zoom lens uses a fixed lens group and two moving lens groups to cooperate, through the second lens group and third lens group to achieve continuous zoom lens Zooming improves the shooting quality of the zoom lens.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Lenses (AREA)

Abstract

一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组(200)及移动终端，应用于手机和平板电脑等移动终端中，以提高变焦镜头的拍摄质量。变焦镜头包括由物侧到像侧依次排列的：具有负光焦度的第一透镜组(G1)、具有正光焦度的第二透镜组(G2)及具有负光焦度的第三透镜组(G3)。其中，第一透镜组(G1)为固定透镜组，第二透镜组(G2)为变焦透镜组，可在第一透镜组(G1)的像侧沿光轴滑动；第三透镜组(G3)为补偿透镜组，可在第二透镜组(G2)的像侧沿光轴滑动。此外，变焦镜头还可包括固定的、且位于第三透镜组(G3)像侧的第四透镜组(G4)。在变焦镜头由广角状态向远摄状态变焦时，使第二透镜组(G2)和第三透镜组(G3)均向物侧移动，并且第三透镜组(G3)和第二透镜组(G2)之间的距离先减小后增大，以实现变焦镜头的连续变焦，提高拍摄质量。

Description

一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请要求在2020年02月29日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010132392.2、申请名称为“一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及到终端技术领域，尤其涉及到一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端。
背景技术
随着智能手机的普及和发展，手机拍照成为人们普遍使用的拍摄方式，并且，对于手机拍摄技术的要求越来越高，如更宽的变焦范围、更高的解析度和更高的成像质量等。
其中，为了获得较宽的变焦范围，市场上的手机的镜头高倍光变普遍采用“跳跃式”变焦的调节方式，如通过搭载多颗不同焦距的镜头，搭配基于算法的数码变焦，实现混合光学变焦，但此种变焦方式不能实现真正意义上的连续变焦，手机在变焦过程中，上述多个摄像头焦段范围断开处的焦距范围内的成像清晰度较差，相对于真正意义上的连续变焦方式拍摄清晰度降低。因此，影响变焦镜头的拍摄质量。
发明内容
本申请提供了一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端，用以提高变焦镜头的拍摄质量。
第一方面，提供了一种变焦镜头，变焦镜头应用于手机和平板电脑等移动终端中。该变焦镜头包括多个透镜组，这些透镜组中包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组、第二透镜组及第三透镜组；其中，所述第一透镜组为具有负光焦度的透镜组，所述第二透镜组为具有正光焦度的透镜组，所述第三透镜组为具有负光焦度的透镜组。在上述透镜组中，所述第一透镜组为固定透镜组，而所述第二透镜组和所述第三透镜组用于在变焦镜头变焦时沿光轴移动来调节焦距。其中，所述第二透镜组作为变焦透镜组，可在所述第一透镜组的像侧沿光轴滑动；所述第三透镜组为补偿透镜组，可在所述第二透镜组的像侧沿光轴滑动。在变焦镜头由广角状态向远摄状态变焦时，使所述第二透镜组和所述第三透镜组均向物侧移动，并且所述第三透镜组和所述第二透镜组之间的距离先减小后增大，即可实现变焦镜头的连续变焦，提高了变焦镜头的拍摄质量。
在一个具体的实施方式中，为了确保变焦镜头具有良好的连续变焦能力，所述第一透镜组、所述第二透镜组和所述第三透镜组中透镜的总个数N满足：
7≤N≤11。
在一个具体的实施方式中，为了使变焦镜头具有较好的成像质量，所述变焦镜头中包含的透镜满足：
N≤非球面的个数≤2N，其中，所述非球面的个数是指所述变焦镜头所包含的所有透镜中的非球面表面的个数；以提高成像质量。
除了采用上述三组透镜组的形式外，还可以采用四组透镜组的形式，如在一个具体的实施方式中，所述变焦镜头还包括第四透镜组，所述第四透镜组位于所述第三透镜组的像侧，其中，所述第四透镜组为具有正光焦度的透镜组；所述第四透镜组为固定透镜组。以进一步改善变焦镜头成像清晰度，提高拍摄质量。
在一个具体的实施方式中，为了确保变焦镜头具有良好的连续变焦能力，所述第一透镜组、所述第二透镜组、所述第三透镜组和所述第四透镜组中透镜的总个数N满足：
7≤N≤13。
而无论是具有三组透镜组的变焦镜头还是具有四组透镜组的变焦镜头，以下限定均是可选的。
在一个具体的实施方式中，为了使变焦镜头具有较好的成像质量，所述变焦镜头中包含的透镜满足：
N≤非球面的个数≤2N，其中，所述非球面的个数是指所述变焦镜头所包含的所有透镜中的非球面表面的个数；以提高成像质量。
在一个具体的实施方式中，为了确保变焦镜头具有良好的连续变焦能力，所述第一透镜组的焦距f1与所述变焦镜头长焦端的焦距ft满足：0.2≤|f1/ft|≤0.9；
所述第二透镜组的焦距f2与ft满足：0.10≤|f2/ft|≤0.6；
所述第三透镜组的焦距f3与ft满足：0.10≤|f3/ft|≤0.7。
在一个具体的可实施方案中，第一透镜组到第三透镜组可以采用不同的组合形式，如：
从物侧至像侧方向依次排列的：具备负光焦度的第一透镜组G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.579；具有正光焦度的第二透镜组G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.293；具有负光焦度的第三透镜组G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.308。或，
从物侧至像侧方向依次排列的：具备负光焦度的第一透镜组G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.573；具有正光焦度的第二透镜组G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.282；具有负光焦度的第三透镜组G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.147。或
从物侧至像侧方向依次排列的：具备负光焦度的第一透镜组G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.605；具有正光焦度的第二透镜组G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.283；具有负光焦度的第三透镜组G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.298。或，
从物侧至像侧方向依次排列的：具备负光焦度的第一透镜组G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端的焦距ft(即变焦镜头处于远摄状态时的焦距)的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.796；具有正光焦度的第二透镜组G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.309；具有负光焦度的第三透镜组G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.597。或，
从物侧至像侧方向依次排列的：具备负光焦度的第一透镜群G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.556；具有正光焦度的第二透镜群G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.241；具有负光焦度的第三透镜群G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.211；具有正光焦度的第四透镜群G4，其焦距f4与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f4/ft|＝0.286。或，
从物侧至像侧方向依次排列的：具备负光焦度的第一透镜群G1，其焦距f1与镜头长 焦端焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.579；具有正光焦度的第二透镜群G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.260；具有负光焦度的第三透镜群G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.205；具有正光焦度的第四透镜群G4，其焦距f4与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f4/ft|＝0.307。或，
从物侧至像侧方向依次排列的：具备负光焦度的第一透镜群G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.634；具有正光焦度的第二透镜群G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.228；具有负光焦度的第三透镜群G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.171；具有正光焦度的第四透镜群G4，其焦距f4与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f4/ft|＝0.570。或，
从物侧至像侧方向依次排列的：具备负光焦度的第一透镜群G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.447；具有正光焦度的第二透镜群G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.217；具有负光焦度的第三透镜群G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.202；具有正光焦度的第四透镜群G4，其焦距f4与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f4/ft|＝0.881。
从物侧至像侧方向依次排列的：具备负光焦度的第一透镜群G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.71；具有正光焦度的第二透镜群G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.23；具有负光焦度的第三透镜群G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.335；具有正光焦度的第四透镜群G4，其焦距f4与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f4/ft|＝0.384。
在一个具体的实施方式中，所述第二透镜组沿光轴运动行程L1与所述变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间满足：0.12≤|L1/TTL|≤0.35。
在一个具体的实施方式中，所述第三透镜组沿光轴运动行程L2与所述变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间满足：0.08≤|L2/TTL|≤0.3。
在一个具体的实施方式中，所述第二透镜组至少包含一个负光焦度透镜，以校正像差。
在一个具体的实施方式中，还包括棱镜或反射镜，其中，所述棱镜或反射镜位于所述第一透镜组的物侧；所述棱镜或反射镜用于将光线偏转至所述第一透镜组，以实现潜望式拍摄，便于更灵活的设计变焦镜头的安装位置和安装方向。
在一个具体的实施方式中，所述变焦镜头中的每个透镜组的透镜具有用于降低透镜的高度的切口，以减少变焦镜头的占用空间，同时，可增大通光量。
在一个具体的实施方式中，所述变焦镜头中每个透镜组包含的透镜的垂直方向高度h满足：
4mm≤h≤6mm，以适应手机等移动终端的安装空间。
在一个具体的实施方式中，为了确保通光量和占用体，所述变焦镜头中每个透镜组包含的透镜的最大通光口径d满足：
4mm≤d≤12mm。
在一个具体的实施方式中，所述变焦镜头处于广角端状态时的主光线角与处于远摄状态时的主光线角的差小于或等于6°。
在一个具体的实施方式中，所述变焦镜头的物距范围可实现从无穷远到40mm的范围。
在一个具体的实施方式中，所述变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值范围满足：0.02≤|IMH/ft|≤0.20。
在一个具体的实施例中，所述变焦镜头的长焦端的有效焦距ft与广角端的有效焦距fw之间满足：1≤|ft/fw|≤3.7。
第二方面，提供了一种摄像头模组，该摄像头模组包括摄像头芯片及上述任一项所述的变焦镜头；其中，光线可穿过所述变焦镜头照射到所述摄像头芯片。通过设置第二透镜组实现变焦，以及，设置第三透镜组对焦距补偿实现对焦，达到连续变焦的目的，改善了变焦镜头的拍摄质量。
第三方面，提供了一种移动终端，该移动终端可以为手机和平板电脑等。该移动终端包括壳体，以及设置在所述壳体内的上述任一项所述的变焦镜头。通过设置第二透镜组实现变焦，以及，设置第三透镜组对焦距补偿实现对焦，达到连续变焦的目的，改善了变焦镜头的拍摄质量。
附图说明
图1示例性地示出了本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头所应用的移动终端的剖视图；
图2示例性地表示出了本申请实施例提供的一种具有三组透镜组的变焦镜头；
图3示例性的表示出图2中第一透镜组的一个透镜的结构图；
图4示例性地表示出了第一种具体的变焦镜头；
图5示出了图4所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程；
图6a表示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线；
图6b表示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线；
图6c表示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线；
图6d表示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线；
图7a示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线；
图7b示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线；
图7c示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线；
图7d示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线；
图8a示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图8b示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图9a示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图9b示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图10a示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图10b示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图11a示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线；
图11b示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变百分比；
图12示例性地表示出了第二种具体的变焦镜头；
图13示出了图12所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程；
图14a表示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线；
图14b表示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线；
图14c表示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线；
图14d表示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线；
图15a示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线；
图15b示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线；
图15c示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线；
图15d示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线；
图16a示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图16b示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图17a示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图17b示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图18a示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图18b示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图19a示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线；
图19b示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变百分比；
图20示例性地表示出了第三种具体的变焦镜头；
图21示出了图20所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程；
图22a表示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线；
图22b表示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线；
图22c表示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线；
图22d表示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线；
图23a示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线；
图23b示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线；
图23c示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线；
图23d示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线；
图24a示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图24b示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图25a示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图25b示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图26a示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图26b示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图27a示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线；
图27b示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变百分比；
图28示例性地表示出了第四种具体的变焦镜头；
图29示出了图28所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程；
图30a表示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线；
图30b表示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在中间焦距状态M下的轴向像差曲线；
图30c表示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线；
图31a示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线；
图31b示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在中间焦距状态M下的横向色差曲线；
图31c示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线；
图32a示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图32b示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图33a示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在中间焦距状态M状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图33b示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在中间焦距状态M状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图34a示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线；
图34b示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变百分比；
图35示例性地表示出了第五种具体的变焦镜头；
图36示出了图35所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程；
图37a表示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线；
图37b表示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线；
图37c表示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线；
图37d表示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线；
图38a示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线；
图38b示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线；
图38c示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线；
图38d示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线；
图39a示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图39b示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图40a示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图40b示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图41a示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图41b示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图42a示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线；
图42b示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变百分比；
图43示例性地表示出了第六种具体的变焦镜头；
图44示出了图43所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程；
图45a表示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线；
图45b表示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线；
图45c表示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线；
图45d表示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线；
图46a示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线；
图46b示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线；
图46c示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线；
图46d示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线；
图47a示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图47b示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图48a示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图48b示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图49a示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图49b示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图50a示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线；
图50b示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变百分比；
图51示例性地表示出了第七种具体的变焦镜头；
图52示出了图51所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程；
图53a表示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线；
图53b表示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线；
图53c表示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线；
图53d表示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线；
图54a示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线；
图54b示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线；
图54c示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线；
图54d示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线；
图55a示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图55b示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图56a示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图56b示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图57a示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图57b示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图58a示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线；
图58b示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变百分比；
图59示例性地表示出了第八种具体的变焦镜头；
图60示出了图59所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程；
图61a表示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线；
图61b表示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线；
图61c表示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线；
图61d表示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线；
图62a示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线；
图62b示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线；
图62c示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线；
图62d示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线；
图63a示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图63b示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图64a示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图64b示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图65a示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图65b示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图66a示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线；
图66b示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变百分比；
图67示例性地表示出了第九种具体的变焦镜头；
图68示出了图67所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程；
图69a表示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线；
图69b表示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线；
图69c表示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线；
图69d表示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线；
图70a示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线；
图70b示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线；
图70c示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线；
图70d示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线；
图71a示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图71b示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图72a示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图72b示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图73a示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变曲线；
图73b示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2状态下的光学畸变百分比；
图74a示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线；
图74b示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变百分比；
图75示出了另一种变焦镜头；
图76示出了图60所示的变焦镜头在手机的应用示意图；
图77示出了另一种变焦镜头。
具体实施方式
为方便理解本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头，对本申请中涉及到的英文简写和有关名词代表的含义：
正光焦度透镜具有正的焦距、有聚光线的效果；
负光焦度透镜具有负的焦距、将光线发散；
固定透镜组在本申请实施例中，固定透镜组指代的是在变焦镜头中位置固定的透镜组；
变焦透镜组在本申请实施例中，变焦透镜组指代的是变焦镜头中通过移动起到调整变焦镜头焦距的透镜组；
补偿透镜组，在本申请实施例中，补偿透镜组指代的是与变焦透镜组协同运动，并用于补偿变焦透镜组调焦范围的透镜组；
成像面，位于变焦镜头中所有透镜的像侧、且光线依次穿过变焦镜头中各透镜后形成像的载面，其位置可参考图2；
F值 F-number F数/光圈，是变焦镜头的焦距/变焦镜头通光直径得出的相对值(相对孔径的倒数)，光圈F值愈小，在同一单位时间内的进光量便愈多。光圈F值越大，景深越小，拍照的背景内容将会虚化。类似长焦变焦镜头的效果；
FOV Field of View 视场角；
TTL Total Track Length 总长，具体是指最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度，TTL是形成相机高度的主要因素；
CRA Chief Ray Angle 主光线角；
IMH image height 半像高，是指成像的边缘至成像面中心的高度。
为方便理解本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头，首先说明一下本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头的应用场景，本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头应用于移动终端的摄像头模组中，该移动终 端可以为手机和平板电脑等常见的移动终端，图1示出了手机的剖视图，参考图1，图1示出了手机的剖视图，摄像头模组200的镜头201固定在移动终端的壳体100，摄像头芯片202固定在壳体100内，在使用时，光线穿过镜头201照射到摄像头芯片202，摄像头芯片202将光信号转换成电信号并成像，实现拍照的效果。现有技术中的摄像头模组200为了获得较宽的变焦范围，常采用跳跃式数码变焦，即通过搭载多颗(如2到3颗)不同焦距的镜头，搭配基于算法的数码变焦，实现混合光学变焦；但是跳跃式数码变焦是基于不同焦距的多个摄像头，依靠算法处理实现连续变焦，并不是真正意义上的连续变焦，在某些焦距范围内成像时清晰度较差。为了解决上述技术问题，本申请实施例提供了一种变焦镜头。
为方便理解本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头，下面结合具体的附图以及实施例对本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头进行说明。
图2示例性地表示出了本申请实施例提供的一种具有三组透镜组的变焦镜头。请参考图2，变焦镜头包含三个透镜组，分别为沿物侧到像侧的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3，其中，第一透镜组G1为具有负光焦度的透镜组，第二透镜组G2为具有正光焦度的透镜组，第三透镜组G3为具有负光焦度的透镜组；其中，正光焦度的透镜组具有正的焦距且具有聚光线的效果，而负光焦度的透镜组具有负的焦距且可将光线发散。
继续参考图2，在上述三个透镜组中，第一透镜组G1为固定的透镜组，如相对于图1中的壳体100位置固定，也即相对于成像面之间的位置固定；第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3可相对于第一透镜组G1沿着变焦镜头的光轴移动。具体地，第二透镜组G2可在第一透镜组G1的像侧沿变焦镜头的光轴滑动，第三透镜组G3可在第二透镜组G2的像侧沿变焦镜头的光轴滑动；其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组对焦距进行较大幅度的调节，实现变焦，第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组对焦距进行较小幅度的微调，实现对焦，为此，第二透镜组G2相对于第三透镜组G3具有较大的行程。
图3表示出图2中第一透镜组G1的一个透镜10，其中，d为透镜10的最大通光口径，h为透镜10的高度；其中，最大通光口径d指代的是透镜10的最大直径。透镜10相对的两侧边(也可以是其中一侧边)具有切口11，以降低透镜10的高度，使得h小于d。在本申请实施例中第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2及第三透镜组G3中的每个透镜都采用类似图3所示的透镜结构，相对于采用直径为h的圆形透镜可增大通光量，相对于采用直径为d的圆形透镜可缩小高度方向尺寸。第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中的最大通光口径满足：4mm≤最大通光口径d≤12mm，上述透镜组中的透镜的最大通光口径可以为4mm、8mm、8.8mm、9.6mm、9.888mm、10mm和12mm等尺寸，以使得变焦镜头可以平衡进光量以及镜头占用的空间。同时，第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2及第三透镜组G3中，每个透镜组的透镜具有于透镜10中切口11类似的切口，如每个透镜的垂直方向高度满足：4mm≤垂直方向高度≤6mm，例如，该垂直方向高度可以是4mm、5mm和6mm等，以降低变焦镜头的高度，使变焦镜头可应用于手机等空间较小的场景中。
为方便理解本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头的效果，下面结合具体的实施例对变焦镜头成像效果进行详细的说明。
图4示例性地表示出了第一种具体的变焦镜头，该变焦镜头从物侧至像侧方向依次包括：具备负光焦度的第一透镜组G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端的焦距ft(即变焦镜头处于远摄状态时的焦距)的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.579；具有正光焦度的第二透镜组G2，其焦距f2与 镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.293；具有负光焦度的第三透镜组G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.308。
继续参考图4，该变焦镜头包含8个具有光焦度的透镜，其中共包含10个非球面，第一透镜组G1包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两个透镜，光焦度依次为正和负；第二透镜组G2包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的四个透镜，光焦度依次为正、正、负和正，第三透镜组G3包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两片透镜，光焦度依次为正和负。上述第二透镜组G2至少包含一个负光焦度透镜，以消除像差；并且，变焦镜头还具有光阑(图中未示出)，该光阑位于第二透镜组的G2物侧，但并不限于此，也可以是设置在第一透镜组G1的像侧或者物侧，或者，第三透镜组G3的像侧或者物侧；第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的最大通光口径为9.888mm。
接下来请参考表1a和表1b，其中，表1a表示出图4所示的变焦镜头在广角状态下各镜片的表面曲率、厚度(Thickness)、折射率(nd)和阿贝系数(vd)；左侧一列表头中的R1至R16指上述8个透镜由物侧至像侧的16个表面，如R1指的是由物侧起第一个透镜的物侧表面，R2指的是由物侧起第一个透镜的像侧表面，R3指由物侧起第二个透镜的物侧表面，R4指的是由物侧起第二个透镜的像侧表面……依次类推；顶行表头中R表示相应的透镜表面的曲率；厚度(Thickness)中，d1至d8依次指由物侧至像侧的8个透镜的厚度，单位为mm；a1至a8依次指的是由物侧至像侧每相邻两个透镜(或透镜与成像面)之间的距离，如a1指的是第一个透镜至第二个透镜之间的间隙大小，a2指的第二个透镜至第三个透镜之间的间隙大小，……依次类推，a8指的是第八个透镜与成像面之间的间隙大小，单位为mm；n1至n8依次指的是由物侧至像侧的8个透镜的折射率；v1至v8依次指的是由物侧至像侧的8个透镜的阿贝系数。表1b表示出了各透镜的非球面表面的非球面系数。
表1a
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000001
表1b
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000002
表1b中所示的变焦镜头的10个非球面中，所有偶次非球面面型z可利用但不限于以下非球面公式进行限定：
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000003
其中，z为非球面的矢高，r为非球面的径向坐标，c为非球面顶点球曲率，K为二次曲面常数，A2、A3、A4、A5和A6为非球面系数。
由于该变焦透镜具有10个非球面，非球面的设计自由度比较高，可根据实际需求设计出较好的非球面面型，提高成像质量。
通光采用图4所示的变焦镜头的结构，变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL与变焦镜头长焦端的有效焦距ft之间的比值|TTL/ft|可做到:0.912，可利用较小的光学总长实现较长的焦距；变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值|IMH/ft|可做到0.08955。
图4所示第一透镜组G1相对于成像面的位置固定，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动，以实现连续变焦。
图5示出了图4所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程。该变焦镜头具有四个焦距状态：W表示 广角端状态，M1表示第一中间焦距状态，M2表示第二中间焦距状态，T表示远摄状态。变焦镜头广角端的状态对应的各个透镜组的相对位置：第三透镜组G3靠近成像面，第二透镜组G2靠近第三透镜组G3的物侧。当变焦镜头由广角端状态W变焦成第一中间焦距状态M1时，第二透镜组G2向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3向第二透镜组G2移动。在由第一中间焦距状态M1变焦成第二中间焦距状态M2时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1方向移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动；在由第二中间焦距状态M2变焦成远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动。
由图5可知，变焦镜头由广角状态W变焦为远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3均是一直向物侧移动，但第三透镜组G3于第二透镜组G2之间的距离先减小后增大，以实现连续变焦。其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L1/TTL|为0.26178；第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L2/TTL|为0.256。
对应参考表1c及表1d。其中，表1c示出了变焦镜头的基本参数，表1d为变焦镜头在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下的透镜组的间隔距离。
表1c
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000004
表1d
  W M1 M2 T
a2 9mm 6.864mm 4.049mm 1.00mm
a6 2.997mm 1.5mm 1.652mm 3.144mm
a8 0.080mm 3.713mm 6.375mm 9.933mm
对图4所示的变焦镜头进行仿真，下面结合附图说明变焦镜头的成像效果。
图6a表示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.2621mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图6a可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.026mm，也就是变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图6b表示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.4669mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图6b可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.024mm，也就是变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图6c表示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.8011mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图6c可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.020mm，也就是变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图6d表示出了图4所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为3.2830mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图6d可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.020mm，也就是变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图7a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图7a可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图7b示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图7b可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图7c示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图7c可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图7d示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图7d可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图8a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图8a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图8a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到 图8b，由图8b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于2.2％的范围内。
图9a示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图9a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图9a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图9b，由图9b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.06％的范围内。
图10a示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图10a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图10a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图10b，由图10b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.6％的范围内。
图11a示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图11a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图11a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图11b，由图11b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.8％的范围内。
图12示例性地表示出了第二种具体的变焦镜头，该变焦镜头从物侧至像侧方向依次包括：具备负光焦度的第一透镜组G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端的焦距ft(即变焦镜头处于远摄状态时的焦距)的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.573；具有正光焦度的第二透镜组G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.282；具有负光焦度的第三透镜组G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.147。
继续参考图12，该变焦镜头包含9个具有光焦度的透镜，其中共包含12个非球面，第一透镜组G1包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的三个透镜，光焦度依次为正、正和负，且由物侧至像侧的第一片透镜为正弯月透镜，且其凸面凸向物侧；第二透镜组G2包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的四个透镜，光焦度依次为正、正、负和正，第三透镜组G3包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两片透镜，光焦度依次为正和负。上述第二透镜组G2至少包含一个负光焦度透镜，以消除像差；并且，变焦镜头还具有光阑(图中未示出)，该光阑位于第二透镜组的G2物侧，但并不限于此，也可以是设置在第一透镜组G1的像侧或者物侧，或者，第三透镜组G3的像侧或者物侧；第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的最大通光口径为10mm。
接下来请参考表2a和表2b，其中，表2a表示出图12所示的变焦镜头在广角状态下各镜片的表面曲率、厚度(Thickness)、折射率(nd)和阿贝系数(vd)；表2a中各项参数的含义可参考表1a相应部分介绍。表1b表示出了各透镜的非球面表面的非球面系数。
表2a
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000005
表2b
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000007
表2b中所示的变焦镜头的12个非球面中，所有偶次非球面面型z可利用但不限于以下非球面公式进行限定：
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000008
其中，z为非球面的矢高，r为非球面的径向坐标，c为非球面顶点球曲率，K为二次曲面常数，A2、A3、A4、A5和A6为非球面系数。
由于该变焦透镜具有12个非球面，非球面的设计自由度比较高，可根据实际需求设计出较好的非球面面型，提高成像质量。
通光采用图12所示的变焦镜头的结构，变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL与变焦镜头长焦端的有效焦距ft之间的比值|TTL/ft|可做到:0.973，可利用较小的光学总长实现较长的焦距；变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值|IMH/ft|可做到0.08988。
图12所示第一透镜组G1相对于成像面的位置固定，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动，以实现连续变焦。
图13示出了图12所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程。该变焦镜头具有四个焦距状态：W表示广角端状态，M1表示第一中间焦距状态，M2表示第二中间焦距状态，T表示远摄状态。变焦镜头广角端状态T对应的各个透镜组的相对位置：第三透镜组G3靠近成像面，第二透镜组G2靠近第三透镜组G3的物侧。当变焦镜头由广角端状态W变焦成第一中间焦距状态M1时，第二透镜组G2向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3向第二透镜组G2移动。在由第一中间焦距状态M1变焦成第二中间焦距状态M2时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1方向移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动；在由第二中间焦距状态M2变焦成远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动。
由图13可知，变焦镜头由广角状态W变焦为远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3均是一直向物侧移动，但第三透镜组G3于第二透镜组G2之间的距离先减小后增大，以实现连续变焦。其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L1/TTL|为0.2454；第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头 从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L2/TTL|为0.23512。
对应参考表2c及表2d。其中，表2c示出了变焦镜头的基本参数，表2d为变焦镜头在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下的透镜组的间隔距离。
表2c
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000009
表2d
  W M1 M2 T
a3 9mm 6.804mm 3.994mm 1.00mm
a7 3.080mm 1.5mm 1.707mm 3.415mm
a9 0.080mm 3.856mm 6.458mm 7.745mm
对图12所示的变焦镜头进行仿真，下面结合附图说明变焦镜头的成像效果。
图14a表示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.3651mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图14a可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.020mm，也就是变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图14b表示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.3651mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图14b可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.020mm，也就是变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图14c表示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.9774mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图14c可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.020mm，也就是变焦镜头在 第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图14d表示出了图12所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为3.5230mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图14d可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.022mm，也就是变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图15a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图15a可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图15b示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图15b可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图15c示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图15c可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图15d示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图15d可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图16a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图16a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图16a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图16b，由图16b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.8％的范围内。
图17a示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图17a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图17a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图17b，由图17b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.3％的范围内。
图18a示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图18a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图18a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图18b，由图18b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.6％的范围内。
图19a示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图19a可以看出成像变形与 理想形状之间差距很小，对图19a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图19b，由图19b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.8％的范围内。
图20示例性地表示出了第三种具体的变焦镜头，该变焦镜头从物侧至像侧方向依次包括：具备负光焦度的第一透镜组G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端的焦距ft(即变焦镜头处于远摄状态时的焦距)的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.605；具有正光焦度的第二透镜组G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.283；具有负光焦度的第三透镜组G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.298。
继续参考图20，该变焦镜头包含7个具有光焦度的透镜，其中共包含12个非球面，第一透镜组G1包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两个透镜，光焦度依次为正和负，且由物侧至像侧的第一片透镜为正弯月透镜，其凸面凸向物侧；第二透镜组G2包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的三个透镜，光焦度依次为正、负和正，第三透镜组G3包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两片透镜，光焦度依次为正和负。上述第二透镜组G2至少包含一个负光焦度透镜，以消除像差；并且，变焦镜头还具有光阑(图中未示出)，该光阑位于第二透镜组的G2物侧，但并不限于此，也可以是设置在第一透镜组G1的像侧或者物侧，或者，第三透镜组G3的像侧或者物侧；第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的最大通光口径为8.8mm。
接下来请参考表3a和表3b，其中，表3a表示出图20所示的变焦镜头在广角状态下各镜片的表面曲率、厚度(Thickness)、折射率(nd)和阿贝系数(vd)；表3a中各项参数的含义可参考表1a相应部分介绍。表3b表示出了各透镜的非球面表面的非球面系数。
表3a
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000010
表3b
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000011
表3b中所示的变焦镜头的12个非球面中，所有偶次非球面面型z可利用但不限于以下非球面公式进行限定：
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000012
其中，z为非球面的矢高，r为非球面的径向坐标，c为非球面顶点球曲率，K为二次曲面常数，A2、A3、A4、A5和A6为非球面系数。
由于该变焦透镜具有12个非球面，非球面的设计自由度比较高，可根据实际需求设计出较好的非球面面型，提高成像质量。
采用图20所示的变焦镜头的结构，变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL与变焦镜头长焦端的有效焦距ft之间的比值|TTL/ft|为:0.896，由此可见，可利用较小的光学总长实现较长的焦距；变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值|IMH/ft|可做到0.08961。
图20所示第一透镜组G1相对于成像面的位置固定，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动，以实现连续变焦。
图21示出了图20所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程。该变焦镜头具有四个焦距状态：W表示广角端状态，M1表示第一中间焦距状态，M2表示第二中间焦距状态，T表示远摄状态。变焦镜头广角端状态T对应的各个透镜组的相对位置：第三透镜组G3靠近成像面，第二透镜组G2靠近第三透镜组G3的物侧。当变焦镜头由广角端状态W变焦成第一中间焦距状态M1时，第二透镜组G2向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3向第二透镜组G2移动。在由第一中间焦距状态M1变焦成第二中间焦距状态M2时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1方向移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动；在由第二中间焦距状态M2变焦成远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动。
由图21可知，变焦镜头由广角状态W变焦为远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3均是一直向物侧移动，但第三透镜组G3于第二透镜组G2之间的距离先减小后增大，以实现连续变焦。其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L1/TTL|为0.26667；第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L2/TTL|为0.27883。
对应参考表3c及表3d。其中，表3c示出了变焦镜头的基本参数，表3d为变焦镜头在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下的透镜组的间隔距离。
表3c
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000013
表3d
  W M1 M2 T
a2 9mm 6.804mm 4.00mm 1.00mm
a5 2.950mm 1.508mm 1.500mm 2.586mm
a7 0.199mm 3.839mm 6.645mm 8.564mm
对图20所示的变焦镜头进行仿真，下面结合附图说明变焦镜头的成像效果。
图22a表示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.3023mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图22a可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.030mm，也就是变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图22b表示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.5116mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图22b可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.030mm，也就是变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图22c表示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.8403mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图22c可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.03mm，也就是变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图22d表示出了图20所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为3.3048mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图22d可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.03mm，也就是变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图23a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图23a可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图23b示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图23b可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图23c示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图23c可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图23d示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图23d可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图24a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图24a可以看出成像 变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图24a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图24b，由图24b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于1.6％的范围内。
图25a示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图25a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图25a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图25b，由图25b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.4％的范围内。
图26a示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图26a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图26a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图26b，由图26b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于1.2％的范围内。
图27a示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图27a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图27a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图27b，由图27b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.4％的范围内。
图28示例性地表示出了第四种具体的变焦镜头，该变焦镜头从物侧至像侧方向依次包括：具备负光焦度的第一透镜组G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端的焦距ft(即变焦镜头处于远摄状态时的焦距)的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.796；具有正光焦度的第二透镜组G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.309；具有负光焦度的第三透镜组G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端的焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.597。
继续参考图28，该变焦镜头包含7个具有光焦度的透镜，其中共包含12个非球面，第一透镜组G1包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两个透镜，光焦度依次为正和负；第二透镜组G2包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的三个透镜，光焦度依次为正、正和负，第三透镜组G3包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两片透镜，光焦度依次为正和负。上述第二透镜组G2至少包含一个负光焦度透镜，以消除像差；并且，变焦镜头还具有光阑(图中未示出)，该光阑位于第二透镜组的G2物侧，但并不限于此，也可以是设置在第一透镜组G1的像侧或者物侧，或者，第三透镜组G3的像侧或者物侧；第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的最大通光口径为9.788mm。
接下来请参考表4a和表4b，其中，表4a表示出图28所示的变焦镜头在广角状态下各镜片的表面曲率、厚度(Thickness)、折射率(nd)和阿贝系数(vd)；表4a中各项参数的含义可参考表1a相应部分介绍。表4b表示出了各透镜的非球面表面的非球面系数。
表4a
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000015
表4b
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000016
表4b中所示的变焦镜头的12个非球面中，所有偶次非球面面型z可利用但不限于以下非球面公式进行限定：
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000017
其中，z为非球面的矢高，r为非球面的径向坐标，c为非球面顶点球曲率，K为二次曲面常数，A2、A3、A4、A5和A6为非球面系数。
由于该变焦透镜具有12个非球面，非球面的设计自由度比较高，可根据实际需求设计出较好的非球面面型，提高成像质量。
采用图28所示的变焦镜头的结构，变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL与变焦镜头长焦端的有效焦距ft之间的比值|TTL/ft|为:1.15，由此可见，可利用较小的光学总长实现较长的焦距；变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值|IMH/ft|可做到0.139。
图28所示第一透镜组G1相对于成像面的位置固定，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动，以实现连续变焦。
图29示出了图28所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程。该变焦镜头具有三个焦距状态：W表示广角端状态，M表示中间焦距状态，T表示远摄状态。变焦镜头广角端状态T对应的各个透镜组的相对位置：第三透镜组G3靠近成像面，第二透镜组G2靠近第三透镜组G3的物侧。当变焦镜头由广角端状态W变焦成中间焦距状态M时，第二透镜组G2向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3向第二透镜组G2移动。在由中间焦距状态M变焦成远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动。
由图29可知，变焦镜头由广角状态W变焦为远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3均是一直向物侧移动，但第三透镜组G3于第二透镜组G2之间的距离先减小后增大，以实现连续变焦。其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L1/TTL|为0.1988；第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L2/TTL|为0.222。
对应参考表4c及表4d。其中，表4c示出了变焦镜头的基本参数，表4d为变焦镜头在广角端状态W、中间焦距状态M和远摄状态T下的透镜组的间隔距离。
表4c
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000018
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000019
表4d
  W M T
a2 7.520mm 3.620mm 0.917mm
a5 3.104mm 2.056mm 2.327mm
a7 2.7mm 7.852mm 10.280mm
对图28所示的变焦镜头进行仿真，下面结合附图说明变焦镜头的成像效果。
图30a表示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.3931mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图30a可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.020mm，也就是变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图30b表示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在中间焦距状态M下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.8062mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图30b可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.03mm，也就是变焦镜头在中间焦距状态M下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图30c表示出了图28所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为3.1856mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图30c可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.03mm，也就是变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图31a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场4.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图31a可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图31b示出了变焦镜头在中间焦距状态M下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场4.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图31b可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图31c示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场4.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图31c可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图32a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波 长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图32a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图32a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图32b，由图32b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于3.0％的范围内。
图33a示出了变焦镜头在中间焦距状态M下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图33a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图33a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图33b，由图33b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于1.2％的范围内。
图34a示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图34a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图34a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图34b，由图34b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.4％的范围内。
以上，通过图4至图34b提供的四种具体实施例，对于变焦透镜包括第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3共三组透镜组的情况进行了示例性地说明；包含三组透镜组的形式但并不限于以上具体形式。
其中，对于各个透镜组的焦距与变焦镜头的长焦端焦距ft的比值不限于图4至图34b提供的具体实施例中的值，只要每个透镜组的焦距与变焦镜头长焦端的焦距满足以下的比例关系即可实现连续变焦；示例性地，第一透镜组G1的焦距f1与变焦镜头长焦端的焦距ft满足：0.2≤|f1/ft|≤0.9，第二透镜组G2的焦距f2与ft满足：0.10≤|f2/ft|≤0.6，第三透镜组G3的焦距f3与ft满足：0.10≤|f3/ft|≤0.7。
图4至图34b提供的四种具体实施例中各个透镜组所分别包含的透镜个数仅仅是示例性的，本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头对每个透镜组具体的透镜个数不做具体限定，仅对第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的总个数N进行限定。例如，每个透镜组可以包含有一个、两个或两个以上的透镜。第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的总个数N需满足：7≤N≤11，以确保变焦透镜具有较好的连续变焦能力和成像效果。其中，N可以示例性地为7、8、9、10和11等不同的正整数。同时，第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中共包含的透镜满足：N≤非球面的个数≤2N，其中，所述非球面的个数是指第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中所包含的所有透镜中的非球面表面的个数，N为第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的总个数，例如，非球面的个数可以为N、1.2N、1.5N、1.7N和2N等。其中，非球面表面为透镜的一个透光表面。
图4至图34b提供的四种具体实施例中，第二透镜组G2与第三透镜组G3滑动过程中，第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L1/TTL|，以及，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L2/TTL|均只是示例性的。只需要第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值满足：0.12≤|L1/TTL|≤0.35，例如可以是0.12、0.16、0.19、0.20、0.25、0.30、0.33和0.35等，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值满足：0.08≤|L2/TTL|≤0.35，例如可以是0.08、0.12、0.16、0.19、0.20、 0.25、0.30、0.33和0.35等，即可通光第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3相互配合达到连续变焦的目的。
在采用上述结构的变焦镜头后，变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL与变焦镜头长焦端的有效焦距ft之间的比值|TTL/ft|满足:0.8≤|TTL/ft|≤1.2，有利通过较短的光学总长实现较长的焦距；变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值|IMH/ft|满足：0.02≤|IMH/ft|≤0.20。例如，可以是0.02、0.05、0.07、0.12、0.15、0.18、和0.20等。变焦镜头的长焦端的有效焦距ft与广角端的有效焦距fw之间满足：1≤|ft/fw|≤3.7，例如，可以是1、1.2、1.6、1.7、1.9、2.2、2.5、2.8、3、3.3和3.7等，以在连续变焦时获得较好的成像质量。
除了采用三组透镜组的变焦镜头外，还可以在图2所示的三组透镜组的变焦镜头的基础上增加第四透镜组G4，并对相关参数值作适应性调整，以保持连续变焦的能力。其中，第四透镜组G4位于第三透镜组G3的像侧，且第四透镜组G4为具有正光焦度的透镜组；第四透镜组G4为相对于成像面固定的透镜组；作为变焦透镜组的第二透镜组G2和作为补偿透镜组的第三透镜组G3沿着变焦镜头的光轴在第一透镜组G1和第四透镜组G4之间移动。通过设置第四透镜组G4可以提高变焦镜头的分辨率，以获得更为清晰的图像，提高拍摄质量。
类似地，第四透镜组G4中的每个透镜也可以采用类似图3所示的透镜结构，以增大通光量，减小高度方向尺寸。第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3和第四透镜组G4中包含透镜的最大通光口径满足：4mm≤最大通光口径d≤12mm，以使得变焦镜头可以平衡进光量以及镜头占用的空间。同时，第四透镜组G4中的透镜也可以具有于透镜10(图3)中切口11类似的切口，第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3和第四透镜组G4中每个透镜的垂直方向高度满足：4mm≤垂直方向高度≤6mm，以降低变焦镜头的高度。
以下通过具体的实施例说明具有四组透镜组的变焦镜头的拍摄效果。
图35示例性地表示出了第五种具体的变焦镜头，该变焦镜头从物侧至像侧方向依次包括：具备负光焦度的第一透镜群G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.556；具有正光焦度的第二透镜群G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.241；具有负光焦度的第三透镜群G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.211；具有正光焦度的第四透镜群G4，其焦距f4与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f4/ft|＝0.286。
继续参考图35，该变焦镜头包含9个具有光焦度的透镜，其中共包含16个非球面，第一透镜组G1包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两个透镜，光焦度依次为正和负，且由物侧至像侧的第一片透镜为正弯月透镜，其凸面凸向物侧；第二透镜组G2包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的四个透镜，光焦度依次为正、正、负和正，第三透镜组G3包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两片透镜，光焦度为依次正和负；第四透镜组G4包含一个透镜，光焦度为正。上述第二透镜组G2至少包含一个负光焦度透镜，以消除像差；并且，变焦镜头还具有光阑(图中未示出)，该光阑位于第二透镜组的G2物侧，但并不限于此，也可以是设置在第一透镜组G1的像侧或者物侧，或者，第三透镜组G3的像侧或者物侧；第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的最大通光口径为9.6mm。
接下来请参考表5a和表5b，其中，表5a表示出图35所示的变焦镜头在广角状态下各镜片的表面曲率、厚度(Thickness)、折射率(nd)和阿贝系数(vd)；表5a中各项参 数的含义可参考表1a相应部分介绍。表5b表示出了各透镜的非球面表面的非球面系数。
表5a
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000020
表5b
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000021
表5b中所示的变焦镜头的16个非球面中，所有偶次非球面面型z可利用但不限于以下非球面公式进行限定：
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000022
其中，z为非球面的矢高，r为非球面的径向坐标，c为非球面顶点球曲率，K为二次曲面常数，A2、A3、A4、A5和A6为非球面系数。
由于该变焦透镜具有16个非球面，非球面的设计自由度比较高，可根据实际需求设计出较好的非球面面型，提高成像质量。
采用图35所示的变焦镜头的结构，变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL与变焦镜头长焦端的有效焦距ft之间的比值|TTL/ft|为:0.97，由此可见，可利用较小的光学总长实现较长的焦距；变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值|IMH/ft|可做到0.08955。
如图35所示，第一透镜组G1和第四透镜组G4均相对于成像面的位置固定，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3在第一透镜组G1和第四透镜组G4之间沿光轴运动，其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，以实现连续变焦。
图36示出了图35所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程。该变焦镜头具有四个焦距状态：W表示广角端状态，M1表示第一中间焦距状态，M2表示第二中间焦距状态，T表示远摄状态。变焦镜头广角端状态T对应的各个透镜组的相对位置：第三透镜组G3靠近第四透镜组G4，第二透镜组G2靠近第三透镜组G3的物侧。当变焦镜头由广角端状态W变焦成第一中间焦距状态M1时，第二透镜组G2向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3向第二透镜组G2移动。在由第一中间焦距状态M1变焦成第二中间焦距状态M2时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1方向移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动；在由第二中间焦距状态M2变焦成远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动。
由图36可知，变焦镜头由广角状态W变焦为远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3均是一直向物侧移动，但第三透镜组G3于第二透镜组G2之间的距离先减小后增大，以实现连续变焦。其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L1/TTL|为0.24615；第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L2/TTL|为0.17871。
对应参考表5c及表5d。其中，表5c示出了变焦镜头的基本参数，表5d为变焦镜头在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下的透镜组的间隔距离；表5e为变焦镜头分别在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下不同视场主光线角的值(CRA值)，其中，左侧一列数字表示不同的视场。
表5c
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000023
表5d
  W M1 M2 T
a2 9.000mm 6.341mm 3.666mm 1.000mm
a6 1.600mm 1.500mm 2.183mm 3.792mm
a8 0.677mm 3.436mm 5.428mm 6.485mm
表5e
  W M1 M2 T
0 0 0 0 0
0.2 2.068 0.406 -0.406 -0.79
0.4 3.924 0.583 -1.052 -1.83
0.6 5.457 0.449 -1.987 -3.15
0.8 6.60 0.128 -3.04 -4.56
1 8.18 -0.488 -4.40 -6.27
对图35所示的变焦镜头进行仿真，下面结合附图说明变焦镜头的成像效果。
图37a表示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.2529mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图37a可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.020mm，也就是变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图37b表示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.5228mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图37b可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.040mm，也就是变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图37c表示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.8687mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图37c可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.03mm，也就是变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图37d表示出了图35所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为3.3225mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图37d可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.05mm，也就是变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图38a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大 视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图38a可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图38b示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图38b可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图38c示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图38c可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图38d示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图38d可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图39a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图39a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图39a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图39b，由图39b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于或等于3％的范围内。
图40a示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图40a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图40a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图40b，由图40b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.8％的范围内。
图41a示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图41a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图41a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图41b，由图41b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.5％的范围内。
图42a示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图42a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图42a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图42b，由图42b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.8％的范围内。
图43示例性地表示出了第六种具体的变焦镜头，该变焦镜头从物侧至像侧方向依次包括：具备负光焦度的第一透镜群G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.579；具有正光焦度的第二透镜群G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.260；具有负光焦度的第三透镜群G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.205；具有正光焦度的第四透镜群G4，其焦距f4与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f4/ft|＝0.307。
继续参考图43，该变焦镜头包含8个具有光焦度的透镜，其中共包含14个非球面， 第一透镜组G1包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两个透镜，光焦度依次为正和负，且由物侧至像侧的第一片透镜为正弯月透镜，其凸面凸向物侧；第二透镜组G2包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的三个透镜，光焦度依次为正、负和正，第三透镜组G3包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两片透镜，光焦度为依次正和负；第四透镜组G4包含一个透镜，光焦度为正。上述第二透镜组G2至少包含一个负光焦度透镜，用于消除像差；并且，变焦镜头还具有光阑(图中未示出)，该光阑位于第二透镜组的G2物侧，但并不限于此，也可以是设置在第一透镜组G1的像侧或者物侧，或者，第三透镜组G3的像侧或者物侧；第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的最大通光口径为9.6mm。
接下来请参考表6a和表6b，其中，表6a表示出图43所示的变焦镜头在广角状态下各镜片的表面曲率、厚度(Thickness)、折射率(nd)和阿贝系数(vd)；表6a中各项参数的含义可参考表1a相应部分介绍。表6b表示出了各透镜的非球面表面的非球面系数。
表6a
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000024
表6b
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000025
表6b中所示的变焦镜头的14个非球面中，所有偶次非球面面型z可利用但不限于以下非球面公式进行限定：
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000026
其中，z为非球面的矢高，r为非球面的径向坐标，c为非球面顶点球曲率，K为二次曲面常数，A2、A3、A4、A5和A6为非球面系数。
由于该变焦透镜具有14个非球面，非球面的设计自由度比较高，可根据实际需求设计出较好的非球面面型，提高成像质量。
采用图43所示的变焦镜头的结构，变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL与变焦镜头长焦端的有效焦距ft之间的比值|TTL/ft|为:0.955，由此可见，可利用较小的光学总长实现较长的焦距；变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值|IMH/ft| 可做到0.08955。
如图43所示，第一透镜组G1和第四透镜组G4均相对于成像面的位置固定，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3在第一透镜组G1和第四透镜组G4之间沿光轴运动，其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，以实现连续变焦。
图44示出了图43所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程。该变焦镜头具有四个焦距状态：W表示广角端状态，M1表示第一中间焦距状态，M2表示第二中间焦距状态，T表示远摄状态。变焦镜头广角端状态T对应的各个透镜组的相对位置：第三透镜组G3靠近第四透镜组G4，第二透镜组G2靠近第三透镜组G3的物侧。当变焦镜头由广角端状态W变焦成第一中间焦距状态M1时，第二透镜组G2向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3向第二透镜组G2移动。在由第一中间焦距状态M1变焦成第二中间焦距状态M2时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1方向移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动；在由第二中间焦距状态M2变焦成远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动。
由图44可知，变焦镜头由广角状态W变焦为远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3均是一直向物侧移动，但第三透镜组G3于第二透镜组G2之间的距离先减小后增大，以实现连续变焦。其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L1/TTL|为0.25016；第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L2/TTL|为0.20385。
对应参考表6c、表6d和表6e。其中，表6c示出了变焦镜头的基本参数，表6d为变焦镜头在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下的透镜组的间隔距离。表6e为变焦镜头分别在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下不同视场主光线角的值(CRA值)。
表6c
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000027
表6d
  W M1 M2 T
a2 9.000mm 6.341mm 3.666mm 1.000mm
a6 1.600mm 1.500mm 2.183mm 3.792mm
a8 0.677mm 3.436mm 5.428mm 6.485mm
表6e
  W M1 M2 T
0 0 0 0 0
0.2 2.29 0.65 -0.18 -0.62
0.4 4.48 1.21 -0.43 -1.30
0.6 6.49 1.59 -0.84 -2.14
0.8 7.99 1.71 -1.51 -3.23
1 8.43 1.45 -2.55 -4.69
对图43所示的变焦镜头进行仿真，下面结合附图说明变焦镜头的成像效果。
图45a表示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.3197mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图45a可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.020mm，也就是变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图45b表示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.5893mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图45b可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.03mm，也就是变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图45c表示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.9403mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图45c可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.04mm，也就是变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图45d表示出了图43所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为3.4027mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图45d可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.05mm，也就是变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图46a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大 视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图46a可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图46b示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图46b可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图46c示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图46c可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图46d示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图46d可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图47a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图47a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图47a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图47b，由图47b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于或等于3％的范围内。
图48a示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图48a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图48a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图48b，由图48b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.8％的范围内。
图49a示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图49a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图49a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图49b，由图49b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于1.2％的范围内。
图50a示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图50a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图50a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图50b，由图50b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于1.2％的范围内。
图51示例性地表示出了第七种具体的变焦镜头，该变焦镜头从物侧至像侧方向依次包括：具备负光焦度的第一透镜群G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.634；具有正光焦度的第二透镜群G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.228；具有负光焦度的第三透镜群G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.171；具有正光焦度的第四透镜群G4，其焦距f4与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f4/ft|＝0.570。
继续参考图51，该变焦镜头包含10个具有光焦度的透镜，其中共包含18个非球面， 第一透镜组G1包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的三个透镜，光焦度依次为正、正和负；第二透镜组G2包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的四个透镜，光焦度依次为正、正、负和正，第三透镜组G3包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两片透镜，光焦度为依次负和负；第四透镜组G4包含一个透镜，光焦度为正。上述第二透镜组G2至少包含一个负光焦度透镜，用于消除像差；并且，变焦镜头还具有光阑(图中未示出)，该光阑位于第二透镜组的G2物侧，但并不限于此，也可以是设置在第一透镜组G1的像侧或者物侧，或者，第三透镜组G3的像侧或者物侧；第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的最大通光口径为9mm。
接下来请参考表7a和表7b，其中，表7a表示出图51所示的变焦镜头在广角状态下各镜片的表面曲率、厚度(Thickness)、折射率(nd)和阿贝系数(vd)；表7a中各项参数的含义可参考表1a相应部分介绍。表7b表示出了各透镜的非球面表面的非球面系数。
表7a
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000028
表7b
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000029
表7b中所示的变焦镜头的18个非球面中，所有偶次非球面面型z可利用但不限于以下非球面公式进行限定：
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000030
其中，z为非球面的矢高，r为非球面的径向坐标，c为非球面顶点球曲率，K为二次 曲面常数，A2、A3、A4、A5、A6和A7为非球面系数。
由于该变焦透镜具有18个非球面，非球面的设计自由度比较高，可根据实际需求设计出较好的非球面面型，提高成像质量。
采用图51所示的变焦镜头的结构，变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL与变焦镜头长焦端的有效焦距ft之间的比值|TTL/ft|为0.904，由此可见，可利用较小的光学总长实现较长的焦距；变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值|IMH/ft|可做到0.08955。
如图51所示，第一透镜组G1和第四透镜组G4均相对于成像面的位置固定，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3在第一透镜组G1和第四透镜组G4之间沿光轴运动，其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，以实现连续变焦。
图52示出了图51所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程。该变焦镜头具有四个焦距状态：W表示广角端状态，M1表示第一中间焦距状态，M2表示第二中间焦距状态，T表示远摄状态。变焦镜头广角端状态T对应的各个透镜组的相对位置：第三透镜组G3靠近第四透镜组G4，第二透镜组G2靠近第三透镜组G3的物侧。当变焦镜头由广角端状态W变焦成第一中间焦距状态M1时，第二透镜组G2向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3向第二透镜组G2移动。在由第一中间焦距状态M1变焦成第二中间焦距状态M2时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1方向移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动；在由第二中间焦距状态M2变焦成远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动。
由图52可知，变焦镜头由广角状态W变焦为远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3均是一直向物侧移动，但第三透镜组G3于第二透镜组G2之间的距离先减小后增大，以实现连续变焦。其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L1/TTL|为0.26403；第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L2/TTL|为0.24389。
对应参考表7c、表7d和表7e。其中，表7c示出了变焦镜头的基本参数，表7d为变焦镜头在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下的透镜组的间隔距离。表7e为变焦镜头分别在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下不同视场主光线角的值(CRA值)。
表7c
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000031
表7d
  W M1 M2 T
a3 9.000mm 6.416mm 3.730mm 1.000mm
a7 1.634mm 1.350mm 1.568mm 2.243mm
a9 0.800mm 3.667mm 6.136mm 8.190mm
表7e
  W M1 M2 T
0 0 0 0 0
0.2 2.33 0.533 -0.41 -0.98
0.4 4.56 0.99 -0.90 -2.04
0.6 6.62 1.31 -1.49 -3.19
0.8 7.80 1.70 -1.96 -4.19
1 8.63 2.34 -2.07 -4.81
对图51所示的变焦镜头进行仿真，下面结合附图说明变焦镜头的成像效果。
图53a表示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.4136mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图53a可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.020mm，也就是变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图53b表示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.6755mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图53b可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.05mm，也就是变焦镜头在 第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图53c表示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为3.0157mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图53c可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.07mm，也就是变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图53d表示出了图51所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为3.4631mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图53d可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.07mm，也就是变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图54a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图54a可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图54b示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图54b可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图54c示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图54c可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图54d示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图54d可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图55a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图55a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图55a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图55b，由图55b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于或等于1.2％的范围内。
图56a示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图56a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图56a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图56b，由图56b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于2.5％的范围内。
图57a示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图57a可以看出成 像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图57a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图57b，由图57b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于2.0％的范围内。
图58a示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图58a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图58a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图58b，由图58b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于1.2％的范围内。
图59示例性地表示出了第八种具体的变焦镜头，该变焦镜头从物侧至像侧方向依次包括：具备负光焦度的第一透镜群G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.447；具有正光焦度的第二透镜群G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.217；具有负光焦度的第三透镜群G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.202；具有正光焦度的第四透镜群G4，其焦距f4与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f4/ft|＝0.881。
继续参考图59，该变焦镜头包含10个具有光焦度的透镜，其中共包含16个非球面，第一透镜组G1包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两个透镜，光焦度依次为正和负，且第一片为正弯月透镜，凸面凸向物侧；第二透镜组G2包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的四个透镜，光焦度依次为正、正、负和正，第三透镜组G3包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的三片透镜，光焦度为依次负、正和负；第四透镜组G4包含一个透镜，光焦度为正。上述第二透镜组G2至少包含一个负光焦度透镜，用于消除像差；并且，变焦镜头还具有光阑(图中未示出)，该光阑位于第二透镜组的G2物侧，但并不限于此，也可以是设置在第一透镜组G1的像侧或者物侧，或者，第三透镜组G3的像侧或者物侧；第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的最大通光口径为8.168mm。
接下来请参考表8a和表8b，其中，表8a表示出图59所示的变焦镜头在广角状态下各镜片的表面曲率、厚度(Thickness)、折射率(nd)和阿贝系数(vd)；表8a中各项参数的含义可参考表1a相应部分介绍。表8b表示出了各透镜的非球面表面的非球面系数。
表8a
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000032
表8b
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000033
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000034
表8b中所示的变焦镜头的16个非球面中，所有偶次非球面面型z可利用但不限于以下非球面公式进行限定：
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000035
其中，z为非球面的矢高，r为非球面的径向坐标，c为非球面顶点球曲率，K为二次曲面常数，A2、A3、A4、A5、A6和A7为非球面系数。
由于该变焦透镜具有16个非球面，非球面的设计自由度比较高，可根据实际需求设计出较好的非球面面型，提高成像质量。
采用图59所示的变焦镜头的结构，变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL与变焦镜头长焦端的有效焦距ft之间的比值|TTL/ft|为0.881，由此可见，可利用较小的光学总长实现较长的焦距；变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值|IMH/ft|可做到0.08955。
如图59所示，第一透镜组G1和第四透镜组G4均相对于成像面的位置固定，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3在第一透镜组G1和第四透镜组G4之间沿光轴运动，其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，以实现连续变焦。
图60示出了图59所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程。该变焦镜头具有四个焦距状态：W表示广角端状态，M1表示第一中间焦距状态，M2表示第二中间焦距状态，T表示远摄状态。变焦镜头广角端状态T对应的各个透镜组的相对位置：第三透镜组G3靠近第四透镜组G4，第二透镜组G2靠近第三透镜组G3的物侧。当变焦镜头由广角端状态W变焦成第一中间焦距状态M1时，第二透镜组G2向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3向第二透镜组G2移动。在由第一中间焦距状态M1变焦成第二中间焦距状态M2时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1方向移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动；在由第二中间焦距状态M2变焦成远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动。
由图60可知，变焦镜头由广角状态W变焦为远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3均是一直向物侧移动，但第三透镜组G3于第二透镜组G2之间的距离先减小后增大，以实现连续变焦。其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L1/TTL|为0.26919；第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L2/TTL|为0.18505。
对应参考表8c、表8d和表8e。其中，表8c示出了变焦镜头的基本参数，表8d为变焦镜头在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下的透镜组的间隔距离。表8e为变焦镜头分别在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第 二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下不同视场主光线角的值(CRA值)。
表8c
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000036
表8d
  W M1 M2 T
a2 8.94mm 6.11mm 3.48mm 1.00mm
a6 1.55mm 1.69mm 2.46mm 4.04mm
a9 0.802mm 3.49mm 5.36mm 6.26mm
表8e
  W M1 M2 T
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.2 1.51 0.51 0.01 -0.23
0.4 2.88 0.93 -0.07 -0.53
0.6 3.98 1.19 -0.26 -0.94
0.8 5.11 1.76 -0.03 -0.89
1 6.83 3.37 1.38 0.41
对图59所示的变焦镜头进行仿真，下面结合附图说明变焦镜头的成像效果。
图61a表示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.0371mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图61a可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.03mm，也就是变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图61b表示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.7073mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm 和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图61b可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.07mm，也就是变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图61c表示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.7073mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图61c可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.07mm，也就是变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图61d表示出了图59所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为3.1842mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图61d可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.06mm，也就是变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图62a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图62a可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图62b示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图62b可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图62c示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图62c可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图62d示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图62d可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图63a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图63a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图63a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图63b，由图63b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于或等于3％的范围内。
图64a示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图64a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图64a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图64b，由图64b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于1.2％的范围内。
图65a示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与 理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图65a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图65a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图65b，由图65b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于或等于0.6％的范围内。
图66a示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图66a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图66a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图66b，由图66b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于0.7％的范围内。
图67示例性地表示出了第九种具体的变焦镜头，该变焦镜头从物侧至像侧方向依次包括：具备负光焦度的第一透镜群G1，其焦距f1与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f1/ft|＝0.71；具有正光焦度的第二透镜群G2，其焦距f2与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f2/ft|＝0.23；具有负光焦度的第三透镜群G3，其焦距f3与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f3/ft|＝0.335；具有正光焦度的第四透镜群G4，其焦距f4与镜头长焦端焦距ft的比值：|f4/ft|＝0.384。
继续参考图67，该变焦镜头包含8个具有光焦度的透镜，其中共包含16个非球面，第一透镜组G1包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两个透镜，光焦度依次为正和负，且第一片为正弯月透镜，凸面凸向物侧；第二透镜组G2包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的两个透镜，光焦度依次为正和负，第三透镜组G3包含由物侧至像侧依次分布的三片透镜，光焦度为依次正、负和正；第四透镜组G4包含一个透镜，光焦度为正。上述第二透镜组G2至少包含一个负光焦度透镜，用于消除像差；并且，变焦镜头还具有光阑(图中未示出)，该光阑位于第二透镜组的G2物侧，但并不限于此，也可以是设置在第一透镜组G1的像侧或者物侧，或者，第三透镜组G3的像侧或者物侧；第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3中透镜的最大通光口径为7.902mm。
接下来请参考表9a和表9b，其中，表9a表示出图67所示的变焦镜头在广角状态下各镜片的表面曲率、厚度(Thickness)、折射率(nd)和阿贝系数(vd)；表9a中各项参数的含义可参考表1a相应部分介绍。表9b表示出了各透镜的非球面表面的非球面系数。
表9a
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000037
表9b
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000038
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000039
表9b中所示的变焦镜头的16个非球面中，所有偶次非球面面型z可利用但不限于以下非球面公式进行限定：
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000040
其中，z为非球面的矢高，r为非球面的径向坐标，c为非球面顶点球曲率，K为二次曲面常数，A2、A3、A4、A5、A6、A7和A8为非球面系数。
由于该变焦透镜具有16个非球面，非球面的设计自由度比较高，可根据实际需求设计出较好的非球面面型，提高成像质量。
采用图67所示的变焦镜头的结构，变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL与变焦镜头长焦端的有效焦距ft之间的比值|TTL/ft|为0.95，由此可见，可利用较小的光学总长实现较长的焦距；变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值|IMH/ft|可做到0.144。
如图67所示，第一透镜组G1和第四透镜组G4均相对于成像面的位置固定，第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3在第一透镜组G1和第四透镜组G4之间沿光轴运动，其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，以实现连续变焦。
图68示出了图67所示的变焦镜头的变焦流程。该变焦镜头具有四个焦距状态：W表示广角端状态，M1表示第一中间焦距状态，M2表示第二中间焦距状态，T表示远摄状态。变焦镜头广角端状态T对应的各个透镜组的相对位置：第三透镜组G3靠近第四透镜组G4，第二透镜组G2靠近第三透镜组G3的物侧。当变焦镜头由广角端状态W变焦成第一中间焦距状态M1时，第二透镜组G2向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3向第二透镜组G2移动。在由第一中间焦距状态M1变焦成第二中间焦距状态M2时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1方向移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动；在由第二中间焦距状态M2变焦成远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2继续向第一透镜组G1移动，第三透镜组G3继续向第二透镜组G2方向移动。
由图68可知，变焦镜头由广角状态W变焦为远摄状态T时，第二透镜组G2和第三 透镜组G3均是一直向物侧移动，但第三透镜组G3于第二透镜组G2之间的距离先减小后增大，以实现连续变焦。其中，第二透镜组G2作为变焦透镜组，第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L1/TTL|为0.2022；第三透镜组G3作为补偿透镜组，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L2/TTL|为0.1845。
对应参考表9c、表9d和表9e。其中，表9c示出了变焦镜头的基本参数，表9d为变焦镜头在广角端状态W、第一中间焦距状态M1、第二中间焦距状态M2和远摄状态T下的透镜组的间隔距离。
表9c
Figure PCTCN2020114566-appb-000041
表9d
  W M1 M2 T
a2 6.443mm 4.753mm 2.402mm 0.900mm
a4 2.384mm 2.276mm 2.485mm 2.868mm
a7 1.941mm 3.740mm 5.882mm 7.000mm
对图67所示的变焦镜头进行仿真，下面结合附图说明变焦镜头的成像效果。
图69a表示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.2614mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图69a可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.06mm，也就是变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图69b表示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.4463mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图69b可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.04mm，也就是变焦镜头在 第一中间焦距状态M1下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图69c表示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为2.7589mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图69c可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.06mm，也就是变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图69d表示出了图67所示的变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差曲线，其中，五条曲线分别表示在半孔径大小为3.0036mm的情况下，650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长下光聚焦深度位置的仿真结果；由图69d可看出，在任一特定的归一化孔径坐标下，每两条不同波长对应的曲线的离焦量的差值均小于0.10mm，也就是变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的轴向像差控制在一个较小的范围内。
图70a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图70a可以看出，五条光线的横向色差基本在衍射极限内。
图70b示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图70b可以看出，五条光线的横向色差基本在衍射极限内。
图70c示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图70c可以看出，五条光线的横向色差均在衍射极限内。
图70d示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的横向色差曲线，其中，图中的五条实线曲线分别为650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm和470nm波长的颜色光对应的仿真曲线，最大视场3.0000mm，虚线表示衍射极限范围，由图70d可以看出，五条光线的横向色差基本在衍射极限内。
图71a示出了变焦镜头在广角端状态W状态下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图71a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图71a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图71b，由图71b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于或等于3％的范围内。
图72a示出了变焦镜头在第一中间焦距状态M1下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图72a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图72a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图72b，由图72b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于2.0％的范围内。
图73a示出了变焦镜头在第二中间焦距状态M2下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图73a可以看出成 像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图73a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图73b，由图73b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于或等于3.0％的范围内。
图74a示出了变焦镜头在远摄状态T下的光学畸变曲线，表示成像变形与理想形状的差异，其中，五条实线曲线分别对应650nm、610nm、555nm、510nm、470nm波长的颜色光，与每条实线对应的虚线分别为光线对应的理想形状。由图74a可以看出成像变形与理想形状之间差距很小，对图74a中的光线的成像变形与理想形状进行百分比计算得到图74b，由图74b可看出光学畸变可控制在小于3.0％的范围内。
以上，通过图35至图74b提供的五种具体实施例，对于变焦透镜包括第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3和第四透镜组G4共三组透镜组的情况进行了示例性地说明；但是，包含四组透镜组的形式但并不限于以上五种具体实施例。
其中，对于各个透镜组的焦距与变焦镜头的长焦端焦距ft的比值不限于图35至图74b提供的具体实施例中的值，只要每个透镜组的焦距与变焦镜头长焦端的焦距满足以下的比例关系即可实现连续变焦；示例性地，第一透镜组G1的焦距f1与变焦镜头长焦端的焦距ft满足：0.2≤|f1/ft|≤0.9，第二透镜组G2的焦距f2与ft满足：0.10≤|f2/ft|≤0.6，第三透镜组G3的焦距f3与ft满足：0.10≤|f3/ft|≤0.7。
图35至图74b提供的四种具体实施例中各个透镜组所分别包含的透镜个数仅仅是示例性的，本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头对每个透镜组具体的透镜个数不做具体限定，仅对第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3和第四透镜组G4中透镜的总个数N进行限定。例如，每个透镜组可以包含有一个、两个或两个以上的透镜。第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3和第四透镜组G4中透镜的总个数N需满足：7≤N≤13，以确保变焦透镜具有较好的连续变焦能力和成像效果。其中，N可以示例性地为7、8、9、10、11和13等不同的正整数。同时，第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3和第四透镜组G4中共包含的透镜满足：N≤非球面的个数≤2N，其中，N为第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3和第四透镜组G4中透镜的总个数，所述非球面的个数是指第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3和第四透镜组G4中所包含的所有透镜中的非球面表面的个数，例如，非球面的个数可以为N、1.2N、1.5N、1.7N和2N等。其中，非球面表面为透镜的一个透光表面。
图35至图74b提供的五种具体实施例中，第二透镜组G2与第三透镜组G3滑动过程中，第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L1/TTL|，以及，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值|L2/TTL|均只是示例性的。只需要第二透镜组G2沿光轴运动行程L1与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值满足：0.12≤|L1/TTL|≤0.35，例如可以是0.12、0.16、0.19、0.20、0.25、0.30、0.33和0.35等，第三透镜组G3沿光轴运动行程L2与变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间的比值满足：0.08≤|L2/TTL|≤0.35，例如可以是0.08、0.12、0.16、0.19、0.20、0.25、0.30、0.33和0.35等，即可通光第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3相互配合达到连续变焦的目的。
在采用上述结构的变焦镜头后，变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL与变焦镜头长焦端的有效焦距ft之间的比值|TTL/ft|满足:0.8≤|TTL/ft|≤1.2，有利通过较短的光学总长实现较长的焦距；变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值|IMH/ft| 满足：0.02≤|IMH/ft|≤0.20，例如，可以是0.02、0.05、0.07、0.12、0.15、0.18和0.20等。变焦镜头的长焦端的有效焦距ft与广角端的有效焦距fw之间满足：1≤|ft/fw|≤3.7，例如，可以是1、1.2、1.6、1.7、1.9、2.2、2.5、2.8、3、3.3和3.7等，以在连续变焦时获得较好的成像质量。
由上述第一种具体的变焦镜头、第二种具体的变焦镜头、第三种具体的变焦镜头、第四种具体的变焦镜头、第五种具体的变焦镜头、第六种具体的变焦镜头、第七种具体的变焦镜头、第八种具体的变焦镜头及第九种具体的变焦镜头的结构及仿真效果可以看出，本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头可以连续变焦，变焦镜头的物距范围可实现从无穷远到40mm的范围。其中，物距的指的是物体到变焦镜头的第一透镜组G1中第一片透镜的物侧表面的距离。由仿真结果可以看出，变焦镜头在变焦过程中，获得比传统混合光学变焦更好的成像质量。并且，变焦镜头处于广角端状态W时的主光线角与处于远摄状态T时的主光线角的差小于或等于6°，例如该差为0.1°、1°、1.2°、1.8°、1.9°、2.2°、2.5°、2.8°、3.2°、3.5°、4°、4.4°、4.8°、5.0°、5.5°和6°等。
图75示出了本申请实施例提供的另一变焦镜头，该变焦镜头的透镜组设置形式不限于图75中的形式，具体可以参考上述各实施例，此外，变焦镜头还包括位于第一透镜组G1物侧的反射镜20，以将光线反射到第一透镜组G1，其中，例如，反射镜20的镜面可以与变焦镜头的光轴成45°夹角，该夹角也可以根据需要调整，从而，可实现潜望式拍摄，使变焦镜头的放置位置和放置角度都更加灵活，如可以使变焦镜头的光轴方向平行于手机屏幕表面。
图76示出了变焦镜头在手机中的应用场景。在变焦镜头300采用潜望式时，变焦镜头300中的透镜组301的排列方向可以平行于手机壳体400的长度方向，透镜组301设置在手机壳体300与中框500之间，应当理解的是，图76中仅仅示例出了透镜组301的设置位置以及设置方式，图76中的透镜组301并不代表透镜组301的实际透镜个数。由图76可看出，变焦镜头采用潜望式时，而可降低对手机厚度的影响。
此外，如图77所示，还可将图75中的反射镜20替换为棱镜30，该棱镜30可以为三棱镜，利用棱镜30的一个面作为反射面，该反射面与变焦镜头的光轴成45°夹角，该夹角也可以适当调整；继续参考图77，示例性地，光线垂直穿过棱镜30的一个入射表面，到达棱镜30的反射面，被反射至棱镜30的出射面，光线垂直穿出出射面并射至第一透镜组G1；棱镜的形状和放置角度不限于上述形式，只要能够将外来光线偏转至第一透镜组G1即可。
本申请实施例还提供了一种摄像头模组，摄像头模组包括摄像头芯片以及上述的任一实施例提供的变焦镜头，光线可穿过所述变焦镜头照射到所述摄像头芯片。摄像头模组具有一个壳体，摄像头芯片固定在壳体内，变焦镜头也设置在壳体内。其中摄像头模组的壳体及芯片可以采用现有中已知的结构，在此不再赘述。变焦镜头通过作为变焦透镜组的第二透镜组和作为补偿透镜组的第三透镜组，并与固定的第一透镜组配合，实现变焦镜头的连续变焦，改善变焦镜头的拍摄质量。
本申请实施例还提供了一种移动终端，该移动终端可以为手机和平板电脑等。该移动终端包括壳体，以及设置在壳体内的上述任一具体实施例提供的变焦镜头。如图76所示的采用潜望式的变焦镜头设置在手机内。一并参考图4中所示的变焦镜头，变焦镜头在采用一个固定的透镜组以及两个运动的透镜组相配合，通过设置的第二透镜组及第三透镜组 实现了对变焦镜头的连续变焦，改善了变焦镜头的拍摄质量。
以上，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (20)

  1. 一种变焦镜头，其特征在于，包括：沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组、第二透镜组及第三透镜组；其中，
    所述第一透镜组为具有负光焦度的透镜组；
    所述第二透镜组为具有正光焦度的透镜组；
    所述第三透镜组为具有负光焦度的透镜组；
    所述第一透镜组为固定透镜组；所述第二透镜组为变焦透镜组并可在所述第一透镜组的像侧沿光轴滑动；所述第三透镜组为补偿透镜组并可在所述第二透镜组的像侧沿光轴滑动。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组、所述第二透镜组和所述第三透镜组中透镜的总个数N满足：
    7≤N≤11。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述变焦镜头中包含的透镜满足：
    N≤非球面的个数≤2N，所述非球面的个数是指所述变焦镜头所包含的所有透镜中的非球面表面的个数。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述变焦镜头还包括第四透镜组，所述第四透镜组位于所述第三透镜组的像侧，其中，
    所述第四透镜组为具有正光焦度的透镜组；
    所述第四透镜组为固定透镜组。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组、所述第二透镜组、所述第三透镜组和所述第四透镜组中透镜的总个数N满足：
    7≤N≤13。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述变焦镜头中包含的透镜满足：
    N≤非球面的个数≤2N，所述非球面的个数是指所述变焦镜头所包含的所有透镜中的非球面表面的个数。
  7. 根据权利要求1至6任一项所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第一透镜组的焦距f1与所述变焦镜头长焦端的焦距ft满足：0.2≤|f1/ft|≤0.9；
    所述第二透镜组的焦距f2与ft满足：0.10≤|f2/ft|≤0.6；
    所述第三透镜组的焦距f3与ft满足：0.10≤|f3/ft|≤0.7。
  8. 根据权利要求1至7任一项所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第二透镜组沿光轴运动行程L1与所述变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间满足：0.12≤|L1/TTL|≤0.35。
  9. 根据权利要求1至8任一项所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第三透镜组沿光轴运动行程L2与所述变焦镜头从最靠近物侧的表面至成像面的总长度TTL之间满足：0.08≤|L2/TTL|≤0.3。
  10. 根据权利要求1至9任一项所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述变焦镜头的半像高IMH与长焦端的有效焦距ft的比值范围满足：0.02≤|IMH/ft|≤0.20。
  11. 根据权利要求1至10任一项所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述变焦镜头的长焦端的有效焦距ft与广角端的有效焦距fw之间满足：1≤|ft/fw|≤3.7。
  12. 根据权利要求1至11任一项所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述变焦镜头处于广角端状态时的主光线角与处于远摄状态时的主光线角的差小于或等于6°。
  13. 根据权利要求1至12任一项所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述第二透镜组至少包含一个负光焦度透镜。
  14. 根据权利要求1至13任一项所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，还包括棱镜或反射镜，其中，
    所述棱镜或反射镜位于所述第一透镜组的物侧；
    所述棱镜或反射镜用于将光线偏转至所述第一透镜组。
  15. 根据权利要求1至14任一项所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述变焦镜头中的每片透镜均具有用于降低透镜的高度的切口。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述变焦镜头中包含的每片透镜的垂直方向高度h满足：
    4mm≤h≤6mm。
  17. 根据权利要求15或16所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述变焦镜头所包含的每片透镜的最大通光口径d满足：
    4mm≤d≤12mm。
  18. 根据权利要求1至17任一项所述的变焦镜头，其特征在于，所述变焦镜头的物距范围可实现从无穷远到40mm的范围。
  19. 一种摄像头模组，其特征在于，包括摄像头芯片及如权利要求1～18任一项所述的变焦镜头；其中，光线可穿过所述变焦镜头照射到所述摄像头芯片。
  20. 一种移动终端，其特征在于，包括壳体，以及设置在所述壳体内的如权利要求1～18任一项所述的变焦镜头。
PCT/CN2020/114566 2020-02-29 2020-09-10 一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端 WO2021169245A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP20921054.1A EP4099076A4 (en) 2020-02-29 2020-09-10 VARIABLE FOCAL LENS, CAMERA MODULE AND MOBILE TERMINAL
KR1020227032784A KR20220136452A (ko) 2020-02-29 2020-09-10 줌 렌즈, 카메라 모듈, 및 이동 단말기
JP2022551577A JP2023515193A (ja) 2020-02-29 2020-09-10 ズーム・レンズ、カメラ・モジュールおよび移動端末
US17/896,276 US20220413269A1 (en) 2020-02-29 2022-08-26 Zoom lens, camera module, and mobile terminal

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010132392.2 2020-02-29
CN202010132392.2A CN113325561B (zh) 2020-02-29 2020-02-29 一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/896,276 Continuation US20220413269A1 (en) 2020-02-29 2022-08-26 Zoom lens, camera module, and mobile terminal

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021169245A1 true WO2021169245A1 (zh) 2021-09-02

Family

ID=77413092

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/114566 WO2021169245A1 (zh) 2020-02-29 2020-09-10 一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (1) US20220413269A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4099076A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP2023515193A (zh)
KR (1) KR20220136452A (zh)
CN (1) CN113325561B (zh)
WO (1) WO2021169245A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114137710A (zh) * 2021-12-06 2022-03-04 辽宁中蓝光电科技有限公司 一种光学变焦镜头

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11822051B2 (en) * 2019-08-30 2023-11-21 Samsung Electro-Mechanics Co., Ltd. Optical imaging system
TWI733556B (zh) * 2020-07-31 2021-07-11 大立光電股份有限公司 影像擷取透鏡系統、取像裝置及電子裝置
CN112415729A (zh) * 2020-12-11 2021-02-26 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 变焦镜头

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010060919A (ja) * 2008-09-04 2010-03-18 Sharp Corp ズームレンズ、ズームレンズユニット、及び電子機器
JP2013218229A (ja) * 2012-04-12 2013-10-24 Panasonic Corp ズームレンズ系、撮像装置モジュール及び撮像表示装置
CN103797396A (zh) * 2011-07-04 2014-05-14 富士胶片株式会社 实像变焦取景器和成像设备
JP2014238469A (ja) * 2013-06-06 2014-12-18 コニカミノルタ株式会社 ズームレンズ及び撮像装置
JP2015079229A (ja) * 2013-10-18 2015-04-23 コニカミノルタ株式会社 ズームレンズ及び撮像装置

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5270866A (en) * 1986-07-18 1993-12-14 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Compact zoom lens
US5182671A (en) * 1988-09-19 1993-01-26 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Variable magnification optical system having a capability of stabilizing the image
JP2743439B2 (ja) * 1989-02-28 1998-04-22 ミノルタ株式会社 有限共役距離ズームレンズ系

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010060919A (ja) * 2008-09-04 2010-03-18 Sharp Corp ズームレンズ、ズームレンズユニット、及び電子機器
CN103797396A (zh) * 2011-07-04 2014-05-14 富士胶片株式会社 实像变焦取景器和成像设备
JP2013218229A (ja) * 2012-04-12 2013-10-24 Panasonic Corp ズームレンズ系、撮像装置モジュール及び撮像表示装置
JP2014238469A (ja) * 2013-06-06 2014-12-18 コニカミノルタ株式会社 ズームレンズ及び撮像装置
JP2015079229A (ja) * 2013-10-18 2015-04-23 コニカミノルタ株式会社 ズームレンズ及び撮像装置

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4099076A4 *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114137710A (zh) * 2021-12-06 2022-03-04 辽宁中蓝光电科技有限公司 一种光学变焦镜头

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4099076A1 (en) 2022-12-07
KR20220136452A (ko) 2022-10-07
CN113325561A (zh) 2021-08-31
EP4099076A4 (en) 2023-07-19
US20220413269A1 (en) 2022-12-29
CN113325561B (zh) 2022-10-28
JP2023515193A (ja) 2023-04-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021169245A1 (zh) 一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端
US7333275B2 (en) Zoom lens system and image pickup apparatus including the same
TWI317024B (zh)
US20090323200A1 (en) Imaging optical system, camera apparatus, and personal digital assistant
TWI424190B (zh) 取像透鏡系統
KR101890304B1 (ko) 줌렌즈 및 이를 구비한 촬영 장치
CN108474926A (zh) 物镜光学系统
US11280980B2 (en) Zoom lens and imaging apparatus having four lens groups
WO2021185185A1 (zh) 变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端
JP4405128B2 (ja) 撮像レンズおよび撮像装置
US11880024B2 (en) Optical imaging lens group
WO2021169557A1 (zh) 一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端
WO2021185201A1 (zh) 变焦镜头, 摄像头模组及移动终端
JP4349553B2 (ja) バックフォーカスの長い固定焦点の広角レンズ
WO2023274041A1 (zh) 一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及移动终端
CN114167585B (zh) 摄像透镜组
US20180259754A1 (en) Zoom lens and imaging apparatus
KR20160113893A (ko) 단초점 렌즈 및 이를 포함한 촬영 장치
US20060215276A1 (en) Zoom lens
CN212341574U (zh) 一种焦距65mm的中焦视频镜头
JP2001100092A (ja) 撮影光学系
JP7140522B2 (ja) ズームレンズ及び撮像装置
JP4132838B2 (ja) 撮像レンズおよび撮像装置
CN111694129A (zh) 一种焦距65mm的中焦视频镜头
CN117572612B (zh) 变焦透镜系统和摄像机

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20921054

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022551577

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020921054

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220901

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20227032784

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE